VC BA Einbau DC D e

07.
2005 Contents
Contents
1 DEFINITIONS AND WARNINGS ..................................................................... 1-1
2 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 2-1
3 FIRST START-UP ............................................................................................ 3-1
4 TRANSPORT, STORAGE, UNPACKING........................................................ 4-1
5 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Installing the units ............................................................................................. 5-1

5.1.1 Installing units of types E, F, G ......................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Installing units of type J upwards...................................................................... 5-4
5.1.3 Mounting units of types M, N and Q ................................................................. 5-5
5.2 Installing the option boards............................................................................. 5-11
6 DESIGN OF DRIVES IN CONFORMANCE WITH EMC REGULATIONS ...... 6-1
7 CONNECTING-UP ........................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Power connections ........................................................................................... 7-4
7.2 Auxiliary power supply, main contactor ............................................................ 7-8
7.3 Control connections ........................................................................................ 7-10
7.4 Fan supply ...................................................................................................... 7-20
7.5 Fan fuses ........................................................................................................ 7-21
7.6 MASTER-SLAVE connection for parallel inverters......................................... 7-24
Siemens AG 6SE7087-6KN60
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 1
Contents 07.2005
8 PARAMETERIZATION..................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Parameter menus ............................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Changeability of parameters............................................................................. 8-5
8.3 Parameter input with DriveMonitor ................................................................... 8-6

8.3.1 Installation and connection ............................................................................... 8-6
8.3.1.1 Installation......................................................................................................... 8-6
8.3.1.2 Connection........................................................................................................ 8-6
8.3.2 Establishing the connection between DriveMonitor and the device ................. 8-7
8.3.2.1 Setting the USS interface ................................................................................. 8-7
8.3.2.2 Starting the USS bus scan................................................................................ 8-9
8.3.2.3 Creating a parameter set ................................................................................ 8-10
8.3.3 Parameterization............................................................................................. 8-12
8.3.3.1 Structure of the parameter lists, parameterization with DriveMonitor ............ 8-12
8.3.3.2 General diagnostics ........................................................................................ 8-17
8.4 Parameter input via the PMU.......................................................................... 8-18
8.5 Parameter input via the OP1S........................................................................ 8-22

8.5.1 Connecting, run-up ......................................................................................... 8-24
8.5.1.1 Connecting...................................................................................................... 8-24
8.5.1.2 Run-up ............................................................................................................ 8-25
9 PARAMETERIZING STEPS............................................................................. 9-1
9.1 Parameter reset to factory setting .................................................................... 9-3
9.2 Quick parameterization procedures.................................................................. 9-9

9.2.1 Quick parameterization, P060 = 3
(Parameterizing with parameter modules)........................................................ 9-9
9.2.2 Parameterizing with user settings................................................................... 9-38
9.2.3 Parameterizing by loading parameter files (download P060 = 6)................... 9-39
9.2.4 Parameterization by running script files.......................................................... 9-41
9.3 Motor list ......................................................................................................... 9-42
9.4 Detailed parameterization............................................................................... 9-45

9.4.1 Power section definition.................................................................................. 9-45
9.4.2 Board configuration......................................................................................... 9-49
9.4.3 Drive setting.................................................................................................... 9-53
9.5 Notes regarding parameterization .................................................................. 9-62

9.5.1 Drive setting according to process-related boundary conditions.................... 9-67
9.5.2 Changes to the function selection parameter (P052) VC(former) .................. 9-69
6SE7087-6KN60 Siemens AG
2 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
07.2005 Contents
10 CONTROL WORD AND STATUS WORD..................................................... 10-1
10.1 Description of the control word bits ................................................................ 10-1
10.2 Description of the status word bits................................................................ 10-11
11 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 11-1
11.1 Replacing the fan............................................................................................ 11-2
11.2 Replacing the fan fuses (types J to Q) ........................................................... 11-3
11.3 Replacing the starting capacitor ..................................................................... 11-3
11.4 Replacing the capacitor battery ...................................................................... 11-4
11.5 Replacing the SML and the SMU ................................................................... 11-4
12 FORMING ....................................................................................................... 12-1
13 TECHNICAL DATA ........................................................................................ 13-1
13.1 Notes regarding water-cooled units.............................................................. 13-20

13.1.1 Notes regarding installation and components .............................................. 13-21
13.1.2 Application .................................................................................................... 13-23
13.1.3 Coolant.......................................................................................................... 13-25
13.1.3.1 Definition of cooling water............................................................................. 13-25
13.1.3.2 Antifreeze additive ........................................................................................ 13-26
13.1.3.3 Corrosion protection agent ........................................................................... 13-28
13.1.4 Protection against condensation .................................................................. 13-29
13.1.5 Notes on materials........................................................................................ 13-31
13.1.6 Cabinet design an connection system.......................................................... 13-32
13.1.7 Characteristic data of water-cooled units, types J, K and L (M, Q, N, R).... 13-33
14 FAULTS AND ALARMS ................................................................................ 14-1
14.1 Faults .............................................................................................................. 14-1
14.2 Alarms........................................................................................................... 14-18
14.3 Fatal errors (FF)............................................................................................ 14-26
15 ENVIRONMENTAL FRIENDLINESS............................................................. 15-1
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 3
07.2005 Definitions and Warnings
1 Definitions and Warnings

Qualified personnel For the purpose of this documentation and the product warning labels,
a "Qualified person" is someone who is familiar with the installation,
mounting, start-up, operation and maintenance of the product. He or
she must have the following qualifications:
♦ Trained or authorized to energize, de-energize, ground and tag
circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety
procedures.
♦ Trained or authorized in the proper care and use of protective
equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
♦ Trained in rendering first aid.
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will

result in death, serious injury and considerable damage to property.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death, serious injury and considerable damage to property.
CAUTION used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.
NOTICE NOTICE used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential
situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or
state.
NOTE For the purpose of this documentation, "Note" indicates important

information about the product or about the respective part of the
documentation which is essential to highlight.
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Operating Instructions 1-1
Definitions and Warnings 07.2005
WARNING Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during

operation.
Non-observance of the warnings can thus result in severe personal
injury or property damage.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around the equipment
This personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warning and
maintenance procedures contained in this documentation.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on
correct transport, proper storage and installation as well as careful
operation and maintenance.
NOTE This documentation does not purport to cover all details on all types of
the product, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in
connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems
arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes,
the matter should be referred to the local SIEMENS sales office.
The contents of this documentation shall not become part of or modify
any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales
contract contains the entire obligation of SIEMENS AG. The warranty
contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of
SIEMENS AG. Any statements contained herein do not create new
warranties or modify the existing warranty.
1-2 Operating Instructions SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
07.2005 Definitions and Warnings
CAUTION Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)

The board contains components which can be destroyed by
electrostatic discharge. These components can be easily destroyed if
not carefully handled. If you have to handle electronic boards, please
observe the following:
Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary.
The human body must be electrically discharged before touching an
electronic board.
Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials - e.g.
plastic parts, insulated desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from
man-made fibers.
Boards must only be placed on conductive surfaces.
Boards and components should only be stored and transported in
conductive packaging (e.g. metalized plastic boxes or metal
containers).
If the packing material is not conductive, the boards must be wrapped
with a conductive packaging material, e.g. conductive foam rubber or
household aluminium foil.
The necessary ESD protective measures are clearly shown again in the
following diagram:
♦ a = Conductive floor surface
♦ b = ESD table
♦ c = ESD shoes
♦ d = ESD overall
♦ e = ESD chain
♦ f = Cubicle ground connection
d
b d b d
e e
f f f f f
a c c a c a
Sitting Standing Standing / Sitting
Fig. 1-1 ESD protective measures
Definitions and Warnings 07.2005
Safety and Operating Instructions

for Drive Converters
(in conformity with the low-voltage directive 73/23/EEC)
1. General 4. Installation
In operation, drive converters, depending on their degree The installation and cooling of the appliances shall be in
of protection, may have live, uninsulated, and possibly accordance with the specifications in the pertinent
also moving or rotating parts, as well as hot surfaces. documentation.
In case of inadmissible removal of the required covers, of The drive converters shall be protected against
improper use, wrong installation or maloperation, there is excessive strains. In particular, no components must be
the danger of serious personal injury and damage to bent or isolating distances altered in the course of
property. transportation or handling. No contact shall be made with
For further information, see documentation. electronic components and contacts.
All operations serving transport, installation and Drive converters contain electrostatic sensitive
commissioninng as well as maintenance are to be components which are liable to damage through
carried out by skilled technical personnel (Observe improper use. Electric components must not be
IEC 60364 or CENELEC HD 384 or DIN VDE 0100 and mechanically damaged or destroyed (potential health
IEC 60664 or DIN VDE0110 and national accident risks).
prevention rules!). 5. Electrical connection
For the purposes of these basic safety instructions, When working on live drive converters, the applicable
"skilled technical personnel" means persons who are national accident prevention rules (e.g. BGV A2) must be
familiar with the installation, mounting, commissioning complied with.
and operation of the product and have the qualifications
needed for the performance of their functions. The electrical installation shall be carried out in
accordance with the relevant requirements (e.g. cross-
2. Intended use sectional areas of conductors, fusing, PE connection).
Drive converters are components designed for inclusion For further information, see documentation.
in electrical installations or machinery. Instructions for the installation in accordance with EMC
In case of installation in machinery, commissioning of the requirements, like screening, earthing, location of filters
drive converter (i.e. the starting of normal operation) is and wiring, are contained in the drive converter
prohibited until the machinery has been proved to documentation. They must always be complied with, also
conform to the provisions of the directive 98/37/EG for drive converters bearing a CE marking. Observance
(Machinery Safety Directive - MSD). Account is to be of the limit values required by EMC law is the
taken of EN 60204. responsibility of the manufacturer of the installation or
machine.
Commissioning (i.e. the starting of normal opertion) is
admissible only where conformity with the EMC directive 6. Operation
(89/336/EEC) has been established. Installations which include drive converters shall be
The drive converters meet the requirements of the low- equipped with additional control and protective devices in
voltage directive 73/23/EEC. accordance with the relevant applicable safety
They are subject to the harmonized standards of the requirements, e.g. Act respecting technical equipment,
series EN 50178 / DIN VDE 0160 in conjunction with accident prevention rules etc. Changes to the drive
EN 60439-1 / DIN VDE 0660 part 500 and EN 60146 / converters by means of the operating software are
VDE 0558. admissible.
The technical data as well as information concerning the After disconnection of the drive converter from the
supply conditions shall be taken from the rating plate and voltage supply, live appliance parts and power terminals
from the documentation and shall be strictly observed. must not be touched immediately because of possibly
energized capacitors. In this respect, the corresponding
3. Transport, storage signs and markings on the drive converter must be
respected.
The instructions for transport, storage and proper use
shall be complied with. During operation, all covers and doors shall be kept
closed.
The climatic conditions shall be in conformity with EN
50178. 7. Maintenance and servicing
The manufacturer's documentation shall be followed.
Keep these safety instructions in a safe place!
07.2005 Description
2 Description
From the DC voltage at terminals C/L+ and D/L-, inverters generate a
three-phase system of variable output frequency with the method of
pulse width modulation (PWM) for feeding three-phase motors at
terminals U2/T1, V2/T2, W2/T3.
When the DC link is charged the control board is supplied with voltage
by an integral power supply unit. If the DC link is discharged, the control
board can be fed via an external 24 V supply at terminal X9.
The unit functions are controlled by the software on the control board.
The unit can be operated via the PMU operator control panel, the user-
friendly OP1S operator control panel, the terminal strip or via a bus
system. Option boards can be used to expand the unit's functions.
Pulse encoders and analog tachometers can be used as motor
encoders.
The power section and the electronics of the inverter are cooled by a
fan. The customer must connect up 230 V AC (50/60 Hz) to the
terminals X18/1...5 to supply the fan.
Terminal strip
Option PMU
boards
Control electronics Serial
interface
ext. X9/1 24 V Internal X18/1 ext.

24 V = X9/2 == power M X18/5 230 V ~
== supply 1~
C / L+ U2/T1
V2/T2 Motor
connection
D/L- W2/T3
DC link
Fuses* PE2
Inverter
PE1
Fig. 2-1 Circuit principle of the inverter
*NOTE The fuses are an option in the case of types E to G!
07.2005 First Start-up
3 First Start-up
After removing the packaging, check that the unit is See section
Unpack and check the intact and undamaged. Only intact units may be started "Transport,
units up. Please also check the label (on the outside of the Storage,
packaging) to ensure that the unit is complete and that Unpacking"
the correct option boards have been fitted.
Mount the unit and Retrofit any option boards which have not yet been See section
install option boards installed, if necessary. Then install the units taking into "Installation"
which have not yet account the requirements at the point of installation and and "Installation
been fitted the EMC instructions. in Conformance
with EMC
Regulations"
Form the DC link If the DC link of the unit was de-energized for more than See section
capacitors, if necessary one year, you have to newly form the DC link capacitors "Forming"
Starting with the protective conductor please connect

the power cables or DC link buses and the 230 V AC for See section
Connect the protective
the fan. If configured, also connect the external 24 V "Connecting-up"
conductor, the power
supply. Pay attention to the EMC instructions when and "Installation
cables or buses and, if
laying the cables. Please do not at this stage connect in Conformance
present, the ext. 24 V
any control, communication, encoder and motor cables with EMC
supply
(exception: cable for connecting up an OP1S, if Regulations"
parameterization is to be effected via the OP1S).
Connect the control Please connect the remaining control, communication,

cables, communication encoder and motor cables. Pay attention to the EMC
cables, encoder cables instructions when laying the cables.
and motor cables WARNING The device must be disconnected from See section
its voltage supplies (24 V DC electronics "Connecting-up"
supply and DC link / mains voltage) and "Installation
before the control and encoder leads are in Conformance
connected or disconnected! with EMC
Failure to observe this advice can result in Regulations"
encoder defects, which may in turn cause
uncontrolled axis movements.
After checking that the cabling has been correctly

connected and that it sits properly, power up the
Power up the external
external 24 V supply or the line voltage. After the
24 V supply or the line 111
electronics power supply has been started, the unit
voltage
initializes itself. The action can take several seconds.
The drive status is subsequently shown on the PMU.
First Start-up 07.2005
If the PMU does not show status °009 after completion of

If necessary, carry out
the unit initialization, or if the unit has already been See section
parameter reset to
parameterized before, you should carry out a parameter "Parameterization"
factory setting
reset to factory setting.
Parameterizing by
See section
download or with AAA
"Parameterization"
parameter modules
De-energize 24 V
supply or line voltage
After checking the unit and the cabling once more, power
up the line voltage or DC bus voltage and perform a
function test according to your parameterization.
WARNING It must be ensured that no danger for

Function test
persons and equipment can occur by
energizing the power and the unit. It is
recommended not to couple the driven
machine until the function test has
been successfully completed.
Further start-up and parameterization according to

your specific requirements siehe "Ans
07.2005 Transport, Storage, Unpacking
4 Transport, Storage, Unpacking

The units and components are packed in the manufacturing plant
corresponding to that specified when ordered. A packing label is
located on the outside of the packaging. Please observe the
instructions on the packaging for transport, storage and professional
handling.
Transport Vibrations and jolts must be avoided during transport. If the unit is
damaged, you must inform your shipping company immediately.
Storage The units and components must be stored in clean, dry rooms.
Temperatures between -25 °C (-13 °F) and +70 °C (158 °F) are
permissible. Temperature fluctuations must not be more than 30 K per
hour.
CAUTION If the storage period of one year is exceeded, the unit must be newly
formed. See Section “Forming".
Unpacking The packaging comprises a wooden base, board and corrugated paper.
It can be disposed of corresponding to the appropriate local regulations.
After the consignment has been unpacked and checked to ensure that
everything is complete and not damaged, the units and components
can be installed and commissioned. Depending on the degree of
protection and type of construction, the units are mounted on a pallet
either with or without transport rails.
Type of Pallet
construction
E, F, G, J, K, L One unit per type of construction
M Three units
• Master Converter type K
• Reactor
• Slave Converter type K without electronics box
N Two units
• Master Converter type L
• Slave Converter type L without electronics box
Q Two units
• Master Converter type K
• Slave Converter type K without electronics box
05.2006 Installation
5 Installation
5.1 Installing the units
WARNING Safe converter operation requires that the equipment is mounted and
commissioned by qualified personnel taking into account the warning
information provided in these Operating Instructions.
The general and domestic installation and safety regulations for work
on electrical power equipment (e.g. VDE) must be observed as well as
the professional handling of tools and the use of personal protective
equipment.
Death, severe bodily injury or significant material damage could result if
these instructions are not followed.
NOTE MASTERDRIVES components are designed in accordance with degree

of protection IP20 or IBXXB in accordance with EN 60529 and as open-
type devices to UL 50, thus providing protection against electrical
shocks. In order to also ensure protection against mechanical and
climatic stresses the components have to be operated in
housings/cabinets/rooms that are designed according to the
requirements of’ EN 60529 and classified as enclosure type to UL 50.
Clearances When positioning the units, it must be observed that the DC link
connection is located at the top section of the unit and the motor
connection at the lower section of the unit.
The units can be mounted flush with each other.
When mounting in switch cabinets, you must leave a clearance at the
top and the bottom of the units for cooling.
Please refer to the dimension drawings on the following pages
regarding these minimum clearances.
When mounting in switch cabinets, the cabinet cooling must be
dimensioned according to the dissipated power. Please refer to the
Technical Data in this regard.
Installation 05.2006
Requirements at the ♦ Foreign particles

point of installation The units must be protected against the ingress of foreign particles
as otherwise their function and operational safety cannot be
ensured.
♦ Dust, gases, vapors
Equipment rooms must be dry and dust-free. Ambient and cooling
air must not contain any electrically conductive gases, vapors and
dusts which could diminish the functionality. If necessary, filters
should be used or other corrective measures taken.
♦ Cooling air
The ambient climate of the units must not exceed the values of DIN
IEC 721-3-3 class 3K3. For cooling air temperatures of more than
40°C (104°F) and installation altitudes higher than 1000 m, derating
is required.
NOTE for types MASTERDRIVES chassis units are CE designated products with
E to G standard IP00 degree of protection.
When installed in a cabinet, an additional direct touch protection is
necessary. IEC60204-1 6.2 must be observed meticulously.
For types E to G there is the option M20 for IP20 degree of protection.
5.1.1 Installing units of types E, F, G
Mounting surface
350 mm
Cooling air E,F G

Type
Clearances 400 320
[mm]
Fig. 5-1 Minimum clearances for cooling air requirement (types E, F, G)
The following are required for mounting:

♦ Dimension drawing for the relevant construction type
♦ M8 or M10 screws, refer to dimension drawing for the quantity
Mounting surface
1050 mm
1025 mm
1025 mm
Cutouts
for M8 screw
350 mm 10 mm 180 mm 10 mm 270 mm

270 mm 360 mm
Type E Type F
Side view Front view
Fig. 5-2 Dimension drawing for types E, F
Mounting surface
1450 mm
1375 mm
Cutout for
M8 screw
350 mm 25 mm 119 mm 270 mm

508 mm
Side view Front view
Fig. 5-3 Dimension drawing for type G
5.1.2 Installing units of type J upwards

Mounting surface Cutout for M8/ M10 screws
H h
Oblong holes Dimen- Type

9 x 12 type J sions
9 x 15 type K [mm] J K
for M8 screws H 1400 1730
h 1345 1675
b b 45 25
550
213
483
708
Side view
800
Front view
Fig. 5-4 Dimension drawing for types J, K
Mounting surface Cutout for M8 screws

1730
1650
9 x 12 slots for M8 screws
25
563
32,5
280
415
550
730
865
1067,5
Side view
1100
Front view
Fig. 5-5 Dimension drawing for type L
5.1.3 Mounting units of types M, N and Q

The three units of type M as well as the two units of type N or Q with
degree of protection IP00 must be assembled as described in the
project planning guide or the accompanying instructions (type M: parts
list and exploded view).
The dimension drawings of the individual chassis give the spacings and
postions of the mounting cutouts / slots.
Mounting surface
1730
1650
24
550
120
390
Side view 497

Front view
Fig. 5-6 Dimension drawing of reactor chassis
The control connections must then be made between master and slave:
♦ Carefully lay the control lines together (through the cable duct in the
reactor chassis in the case of type M) into the master cabinet.
• Plug connector insert -X238 / -X234 / -X32 / -X42
• Fiber optic cable insert U41 / U51 / U61 / U42 / U43 / U52 /
U53 / U62 / U63 in the master on the IPI
NOTE Plugging in the fiber optic cables:

Push in the fiber optic cables as far as they will go (approx. 16 mm),
and tighten union nut finger tight.
CAUTION Fiber optic cables must not be kinked.

Bending radius for fiber optic cables ≥ 30 mm.
Air cooling Door/roof openings

An underpressure is created in the openings of the cabinet doors due to
the flow of air. This is dependent on the volumetric flow and the
hydraulic cross-section of the openings.
The flow causes a build-up (over) pressure in the roof or in the top
cover.
As a result of the difference in pressure between the overpressure at
the top and the underpressure at the bottom of the cabinet, a flow of air
is created inside the unit, a so-called arcing short-circuit. This can be
stronger or weaker depending on the volumetric flow and the door/roof
opening cross-section.
As a result of the flow inside the unit, air which is already pre-heated
enters the heat sinks which causes an excessively high component
temperature rise. In addition, a different, more unfavourable operating
point is set for the fan.
If the units are operated with an arcing short-circuit, this will result in the
failure of the units or in their destruction!
An arcing short-circuit must be prevented by the provision of
partitions.
The switch cabinets adjacent to the inverter cabinets must also be

taken into consideration in this case.
The figure shows the necessary partition measures. Partitions should

be executed up to the cabinet frame and should be designed in such a
way that the discharged air flow is taken around the cabinet beams and
not pressed into them.
Partitions are necessary with all types of protection higher than IP20.
The necessary opening cross-sections are indicated in the table.

The indicated opening cross-section is made up of several holes. In
order to keep the pressure loss here to a minimum, the cross-sectional
2
surface has to be at least 280 mm per hole (e.g. 7 mm x 40 mm).
The opening and hole cross-sections ensure functioning even with high
types of protection.
These are implemented by using wire-lattices (wire fabric DIN 4189-
St-vzk-1x0.28) in front of the openings or the filters indicated in the
following. If finer filters are used, the filter surface and thus the opening
cross-section (upwards) have to be adapted accordingly.
If filters are used, the intervals for their replacement must be
observed!
Filters The following filter mat is approved for use:

FIBROIDELASTOV made by DELBAG-Luftfilter GMBH
Technical filter data in accordance with DIN 24185:

Design FIBROID ELASTOV 10
Filter class EU 2
Volumetric flow V (m3/h) x m2 2500 - 10000
Initial pressure difference ∆pA Pa 9 - 46
End pressure difference ∆pE Pa 300
Average degree of separation % 72
Dust storage capability g/m2 -
Fire behaviour (DIN 53438) F1/K1
Heat resistance max. °C 80
Humidity resistance (rel. humidity) % 100
Dimensions: 1000 x 1500 x 10 mm

Order No.: 16 065 81
Manufacturer:
DELBAG-Luftfilter GMBH
Holzhauser Straße 159
13509 Berlin 27
Telephone: (030) 4381-0
Fax: (030) 4381-222
Initial pressure difference ∆ pA [Pa]
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000
Volumetric flow V [(m³/h) x m²]
Fig. 5-7 Data sheet of the filter mat
Notes regarding type L:

An "active" roof section should be used for types of protection higher
than IP20.
This roof section contains fans which blow the air out to the front.
For this purpose, fans which accomplish a volumetric flow of 1m³/s at a
pressure of 80 Pa are required (e.g. 3 Nos. EBM W2E250HL06-01 in
parallel). Except for the air outlets of these fans, the roof section is
closed.
In order to enable adequate convection to be obtained in the range of
the output bars, a directed (low) arcing short-circuit has to be accepted.
For this, 5 holes each having a 100 mm2 cross-sectional area must be
made in the partition plate above the termination panel on the right-
hand side of the unit. (See following diagram).
Fans, volumetric
flow, opening cross-
sections per inverter
unit
Number of
inverters
MLFB 6SE70xx-xTJ60 6SE703x-xTK60 6SE7041-1TK60 6SE7041-xTL60
1x 6SE70xx-xUJ60 6SE703x-xUK60 6SE7038-6UK60 6SE7041-xUL60
6SE70xx-xWJ60 6SE703x-xWK60 6SE7038-6WK60 6SE7041-xWL60
6SE7041-6TM60 6SE7041-xUM60 6SE7042-5TN60
2x 6SE7041-xWM60 6SE7042-xUN60
6SE7042-1TM60 6SE7042-xWN60
Fan 1 x RH28M 2 x RH28M RH35B RH35B
Minimum volumetric flow [m3/s] 0.46 0.6 0.88 0.95
Min. opening cross-section in the
cabinet doors [m2] 0.26 0.26 0.28 0.38
Type of protection IP00 to IP42
Min. opening cross-section in the
top cover [m2] 0.26 0.26 0.28 0.38
Type of protection < IP20
Min. opening cross-section in the 0.2 + fan
roof section [m2] 0.26 0.26 0.28 (see construction
Type of protection IP22 to IP42 type L)
Table 5-1 Fans, volumetric flow, opening cross-sections
Opening cross-section in Direct partition

the roof section at the top between the fan box
(also possible at the front and the cabinet frame
and/or at the side) from all 4 sides
Holes
(only for type L)
Cabinet frame
Partition to adjacent
cabinets on the left,
on the right and at the
rear
Opening cross-
sections in the doors
(maybe with filters
situated behind them)
Fig. 5-8 Partition measures
Water cooling The units with water cooling (MLFB Annex: -1AA0 / -1AA1) are suitable
for installing in an enclosed cabinet (IP54). The components not
mounted on the heat sink, such as the electronics and the DC link
capacitors are cooled by heat transfer at the heat sink fins. To enable
this heat transfer to take place, air circulation inside the unit is
necessary.
Therefore, when installing the chassis unit in a cabinet, you must make
sure that the air being discharged from the fan can flow into the inside
of the chassis. The partitions to be provided in units with air cooling
are a disturbing factor in this case! They should not be mounted.
For an application in the types of protection > IP40, a distance of at

least 90 mm must be observed between the top of the units and the top
of the cabinet.
The units do not require external cooling air.

Additional losses cannot be dissipated!
1-inch internal threads are envisaged for the water connection. The
connecting nipples should be made of stainless steel or thick-walled
aluminium. Ideally, the connection should have flat seals. If the
connecting pieces enclosed with the units are used, these should be
sealed with Loctite 542 or with teflon tape.
Cooling water infeed (blue) and return (red) must be connected
according to the color scheme! The color markings can be found next to
the 1-inch water connection below the heat sink.
Built-in components If components are built into a cabinet roof section (DC bus, DC 24 V
in the roof section supply), these should be placed in the center if possible so that the air
leaving the fans can reach the openings in the roof cover unobstructed.
Implementation of In order to ensure that the units can function satisfactorily (in view of
the DC 24 V auxiliary electromagnetic influences), it may be necessary to provide each
supply chassis unit with its own DC 24 V auxiliary supply with an isolating
transformer.
In the case of type M, N, Q the DC 24 V supply for master and slave
can be arranged as a joint infeed if the 24 V cable to the slave is in the
envisaged shield duct.
5.2 Installing the option boards
CAUTION The boards may only be replaced by qualified personnel.

It is not permitted to withdraw or insert the boards under voltage.
Slots A maximum of six slots are available in the electronics box of the unit
for installing option boards. The slots are designated with the letters A
to G. Slot B is not provided in the electronics box. It is used in units of
the Compact PLUS type of construction.
If you wish to use slots D to G, you will additionally require the
following:
♦ Bus expansion LBA (Local Bus Adapter), which is used for mounting
the CU board and up to two adaption boards, and
♦ An adaption board (ADB - Adaption Board) on which up to two
option boards can be mounted.
The slots are situated at the following positions:
♦ Slot A CU board Position: top
♦ Slot C CU board Position: bottom
♦ Slot D Adaption board at mounting position 2 Position: top
♦ Slot E Adaption board at mounting position 2 Position: bottom
♦ Slot F Adaption board at mounting position 3 Position: top
♦ Slot G Adaption board at mounting position 3 Position: bottom
Mounting
position 1
Mounting
position 3
Mounting
position 2
Fig. 5-9 Position of the slots for Compact and chassis type units
NOTE Mounting position 2 can be used for technology boards (T100, T300,
TSY).
Mounting positions 2 and 3 can also be used for communication boards
SCB1 and SCB2.
DANGER The unit has hazardous voltage levels up to 5 minutes after it has been
powered down due to the DC link capacitors. The unit or the DC link
terminals must not be worked on until at least after this delay time.
CAUTION The option boards contain components which could be damaged by

electrostatic discharge. These components can be very easily
destroyed if not handled with caution. You must observe the ESD
cautionary measures when handling these boards.
Disconnecting the unit from the supply
DANGER Disconnect the unit from the incoming power supply (AC or DC supply)
and de-energize the unit. Remove the 24 V voltage supply for the
electronics. Take off all connecting leads.
Open the front panel.

Preparing Remove the CU board or the adaption board from the electronics box
installation as follows:
♦ Disconnect the connecting cables to the CU board or to the option
boards.
♦ Undo the fixing screws on the handles above and below the CU
board or the adaption board.
♦ Pull the CU board or the adaption board out of the electronics box
using the handles.
♦ Place the CU board or the adaption board on a grounded working
surface.
Installing the option Insert the option board from the right onto the 64-pole system
board connector on the CU board or on the adaption board. The view shows
the installed state.
Screw the option board tight at the fixing points in the front section of
the option board using the two screws attached.
NOTE The option board must be pressed tightly onto the plug connector, it is
not sufficient to simply tighten the screws!
Re-installing the unit Re-install the CU board or the adaption board in the electronics box as
follows:
♦ Insert the CU board into mounting position 1 and the adaption board
into mounting position 2 or 3.
NOTE The mounting position 3 can only be used when an adaption board or a
technology board has been mounted in mounting position 2. Boards
should first be installed in mounting position 2, before mounting position
3 is used.
♦ Secure the CU board/adaption board at the handles with the fixing
screws.
Re-connect the previously removed connections.
Check that all the connecting cables and the shield sit properly and are
in the correct position.
07.2005 Design of drives in conformance with EMC regulations
6 Design of drives in conformance with

EMC regulations
Basic EMC rules
Rules 1 to 13 are generally applicable. Rules 14 to 20 are particularly
important for limiting noise emission.
Rule 1 All of the metal cabinet parts must be connected through the largest
possible surface areas (not paint on paint). If required, use serrated
washers. The cabinet door must be connected to the cabinet through
grounding straps which must be kept as short as possible.
NOTE Grounding installations/machines is essentially a protective measure.

However, in the case of drive systems, this also has an influence on the
noise emission and noise immunity. A system can either be grounded
in a star configuration or each component grounded separately.
Preference should be given to the latter grounding system in the case
of drive systems, i.e. all parts of the installation to be grounded are
connected through their surface or in a mesh pattern.
Rule 2 Signal cables and power cables must be routed separately (to eliminate
coupled-in noise). Minimum clearance: 20 cm. Provide partitions
between power cables and signal cables. The partitions must be
grounded at several points along their length.
Rule 3 Contactors, relays, solenoid valves, electromechanical operating hours
counters, etc. in the cabinet must be provided with quenching elements,
for example, RC elements, diodes, varistors. These quenching devices
must be connected directly at the coil.
Rule 4 Non-shielded cables associated with the same circuit (outgoing and
incoming conductor) must be twisted, or the surface between the
outgoing and incoming conductors kept as small as possible in order to
prevent unnecessary coupling effects.
Rule 5 Eliminate any unnecessary cable lengths to keep coupling
capacitances and inductances low.
Rule 6 Connect the reserve cables/conductors to ground at both ends to
achieve an additional shielding effect.
Rule 7 In general, it is possible to reduce the noise being coupled-in by routing
cables close to grounded cabinet panels. Therefore, wiring should be
routed as close as possible to the cabinet housing and the mounting
panels and not freely through the cabinet. The same applies for reserve
cables/conductors.
Rule 8 Tachometers, encoders or resolvers must be connected through a
shielded cable. The shield must be connected to the tachometer,
encoder or resolver and at the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES through a
large surface area. The shield must not be interrupted, e.g. using
intermediate terminals. Pre-assembled cables with multiple shields
should be used for encoders and resolvers (see Catalog DA65).
Design of drives in conformance with EMC regulations 07.2005
Rule 9 The cable shields of digital signal cables must be connected to ground
at both ends (transmitter and receiver) through the largest possible
surface area. If the equipotential bonding is poor between the shield
connections, an additional equipotential bonding conductor with at least
10 mm² must be connected in parallel to the shield, to reduce the shield
current. Generally, the shields can be connected to ground (= cabinet
housing) in several places. The shields can also be connected to
ground at several locations, even outside the cabinet.
Foil-type shields are not to be favoured. They do not shield as well as
braided shields; they are poorer by a factor of at least 5.
Rule 10 The cable shields of analog signal cables can be connected to ground
at both ends if the equipotential bonding is good. Good equipotential
bonding is achieved if Rule 1 is observed.
If low-frequency noise occurs on analog cables, for example:
speed/measured value fluctuations as a result of equalizing currents
(hum), the shields are only connected for analog signals at one end at
the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES. The other end of the shield should
be grounded through a capacitor (e.g. 10 nF/100 V type MKT).
However, the shield is still connected at both ends to ground for high
frequency as a result of the capacitor.
Rule 11 If possible, the signal cables should only enter the cabinet at one side.
Rule 12 If SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES are operated from an external 24 V
power supply, this power supply must not feed several consumers
separately installed in various cabinets (hum can be coupled-in!). The
optimum solution is for each SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVE to have its
own power supply.
Rule 13 Prevent noise from being coupled-in through the supply.
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES and automation units/control electronics
should be connected-up to different supply networks. If there is only
one common network, the automation units/control electronics have to
be de-coupled from the supply using an isolating transformer.
Rule 14 The use of a radio interference suppression filter is obligatory to
maintain limit value class "First environment" or "Second environment",
even if sinusoidal filters or dv/dt filters are installed between the motor
and SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES.
Whether an additional filter has to be installed for further consumers,
depends on the control used and the wiring of the remaining cabinet.
Rule 15 A noise suppression filter should always be placed close to the fault
source. The filter must be connected to the cabinet housing, mounting
panel, etc. through a large surface area. A bare metal mounting panel
(e.g. manufactured from stainless steel, galvanized steel) is best, as
electrical contact is established through the entire mounting surface. If
the mounting panel is painted, the paint has to be removed at the screw
mounting points for the frequency converter and the noise suppression
filter to ensure good electrical contact.
The incoming and outgoing cables of the radio interference suppression
filter have to be spatially separated/isolated.
Rule 16 In order to limit the noise emitted, all variable-speed motors have to be
connected-up using shielded cables, with the shields being connected
to the respective housings at both ends in a low-inductive manner
(through the largest possible surface area). The motor feeder cables
also have to be shielded inside the cabinet or at least shielded using
grounded partitions. Suitable motor feeder cable e.g. Siemens
PROTOFLEX-EMV-CY (4 x 1.5 mm2 ... 4 x 120 mm2) with Cu shield.
Cables with steel shields are unsuitable.
A suitable PG gland with shield connection can be used at the motor to
connect the shield. It should also be ensured that there is a low-
impedance connection between the motor terminal box and the motor
housing. If required, connect-up using an additional grounding
conductor. Do not use plastic motor terminal boxes!
Rule 17 A line reactor has to be installed between the radio interference
suppression filter and the SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES.
Rule 18 The line supply cable has to be spatially separated from the motor
feeder cables, e.g. by grounded partitions.
Rule 19 The shield between the motor and SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES must
not be interrupted by the installation of components such as output
reactors, sinusoidal filters, dv/dt filters, fuses, contactors. The
components must be mounted on a mounting panel which
simultaneously serves as the shield connection for the incoming and
outgoing motor cables. Grounded partitions may be necessary to shield
the components.
Rule 20 In order to limit the radio interference (especially for limit value class
"First environment "), in addition to the line supply cable, all cables
externally connected to the cabinet must be shielded.
Examples of these basic rules:
Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2 Cabinet 3
*) Keep the radio interference

suppression filters away from
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
air discharge duct, e.g. by
Netz Netz
mounting at another level
Rule
13 Rule
14
~ ~
Rule = =
17
*) *) Rule 12
Control
Fig. 3.5.3
Rule Rule
9, 10 4, 5, 7
Rule
Fig. 3.5.6 19
Fig 3.5.4
Z Rule 2
Grounding rail
Fig. 3.5.2
Rule 16
Z
Rule 8
Shield connection
Fig. 6-1 Examples for applying the basic EMC rules
Connect at both ends to the

cabinet housing through the
largest possible surface area!
Shield rail
Cable retaining bar
Fig. 6-2 Connecting the motor cable shield where the cable enters the cabinet
PG gland
Motor terminal box
Fig. 6-3 Shield connection at the motor
The shield can be connected through a PG or metric gland (nickel-

plated brass) with a strain relief bar. Thus, the degree of protection IP
20 can be achieved.
For higher degrees of protection (up to IP 68), there are special PG
glands with shield connection, e.g.:
♦ SKINDICHT SHVE, Messrs. Lapp, Stuttgart
♦ UNI IRIS Dicht or UNI EMV Dicht, Messrs. Pflitsch, Hückeswagen
It is not permissible to use plastic motor terminal boxes!
Shield
clamp
Cable con-
nector
Fig. 6-4 Connecting the signal cable shields for SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
♦ Every SIMOVERT ♦ For chassis units (sizes ≥ E),

MASTERDRIVES has shield the shields can be additionally
clamps to connect the signal connected using cable
cable shields. connectors at the shield
connecting locations.
Serrated bar Cable connector
Connect serrated bars

at both ends to the Intermediate terminals
cabinet housing
through the largest
possible surface area!
Fig. 6-5 Connecting signal cable shields in the cabinet
Wherever possible, intermediate terminals should not be used as they

reduce the shielding effect!
05.2006 Connecting-up
7 Connecting-up
DANGER SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES units are operated at high voltages.

The equipment must be in a no-voltage condition (disconnected from
the supply) before any work is carried out!
Only professionally trained, qualified personnel must work on or with
the units.
Death, severe bodily injury or significant property damage could occur if
these warning instructions are not observed.
Only create electrical connections if the unit is in a no-voltage condition!
Hazardous voltages are still present in the unit up to 5 minutes after it
has been powered down due to the DC link capacitors. Thus, the
appropriate delay time must be observed before working on the unit or
on the DC link terminals.
The power terminals and control terminals can still be live even when
the motor is stationary.
When working on an opened unit, it should be observed that live
components (at hazardous voltage levels) can be touched (shock
hazard).
The user is responsible that all the units are installed and connected-up
according to recognized regulations in that particular country as well as
other regionally valid regulations. Cable dimensioning, fusing,
grounding, shutdown, isolation and overcurrent protection should be
particularly observed.
NOTE The inverters are suitable for connection to

♦ rectifier units,
♦ rectifier/regenerative feedback units and
♦ self-commutating rectifier/regenerative feedback units (AFE), which
are fed from systems with or without grounded neutral point (TN
systems and TT systems or IT systems according to EN 60364-3).
The inverters are dimensioned for overvoltage category III according to
IEC 60664-1.
In systems with grounded phase conductor and a line voltage
> 600 V AC measures should be provided on the plant side to limit any
overvoltages occurring to overvoltage category II according to
IEC 60664-1.
Connecting-up 05.2006
PE1 / GND
DC link connection C/L+
Aux. contactor, D/L-

external DC24 V
supply X9
Fan supply X18:1/5
X300 X108
X101
Control board (CUVC)
X102
X103
Shield connection
for control cables
and tachometer cables
U2/T1
V2/T2
W2/T3
Motor connection
PE2 / GND
Fig. 7-1 Connection overview for type E and F
NOTE The 230 V fan must be supplied with AC 230 V externally via terminal
strip X18 1/5 on the PSU.
DC link
connection
PE1 / GND
C/L+
D/L-
X300
X108
X101
Control board (CUVC)
X102
X103
Aux. contactor, external

DC24 V supply X9
Fan supply X18:1/5
Shield connection
for control cables
and tachometer cables
U2/T1
V2/T2
W2/T3
Motor connection PE2 / GND
Fig. 7-2 Connection overview for type G
7.1 Power connections
WARNING If the input and output terminals are mixed up, the unit will be
destroyed!
If the input terminals are mixed up, the converter or the rectifier unit can
be destroyed!
The supply terminals are marked as follows:

DC connection: C/L+ D/L-
Motor connection: U2/T1 V2/T2 W2/T3
Protective conductor connection: PE1 PE2
NOTICE When connected to DC busbars, the units have to be protected with

fuses according to Fig. 7-3 and Table 7-1. If the connection between
the busbar and the unit is short-circuit-proof, protection can also be
provided via internal unit fuses (internal unit fuses are standard from
type ≥ J onwards, and are available as option L30 for units of type
"E" – "G").
C/L+
D/L−
P/3
D/L− C/L+ P/3 1
=
~
P/3 2
M
3~
Fig. 7-3 DC busbars
Input voltage DC 510 V to 650 V

Order No. Rated input Infeed-side Motor side
current cross-section Recommended fuse cross-section
6SE70... VDE AWG gR (SITOR) VDE AWG
[A] [mm²] MCM [A] Type [mm²] MCM
31-0TE60 110 1x70 1x000 160 3NE3224 1x35 1x0
31-2TF60 148 2x35 2x0 250 3NE3227 2x25 2x2
31-5TF60 174 2x35 2x0 250 3NE3227 2x25 2x2
31-8TF60 221 2x50 2x00 315 3NE3230-0B 2x35 2x0
32-1TG60 250 2x70 2x000 450 3NE3233 2x50 2x00
32-6TG60 309 2x95 2x4/0 450 3NE3233 2x70 2x000
33-2TG60 375 2x120 2x300 500 3NE3334-0B 2x95 2x4/0
33-7TG60 440 2x120 2x300 630 3NE3336 2x120 2x300
35-1TJ60 607 4x300 4x800 450 2x3NE3233 2x300 2x800
36-0TJ60 702 4x300 4x800 560 2x3NE3335 4x300 4x800
37-0TJ60 821 4x300 4x800 560 2x3NE3335 4x300 4x800
38-6TK60 1023 4x300 4x800 710 2x3NE3337-8 4x300 4x800
41-1TK60 1310 6x300 6x800 800 2x3NE3338-8 4x300 4x800
41-3TL60 1551 6x300 6x800 900 2x3NE3340-8 4x300 4x800
41-6TQ60 1940 6x300 6x800 710 2x2x3NE3337-8 4x300 4x800
41-6TM60 1940 6x300 6x800 710 2x2x3NE3337-8 4x300 4x800
42-5TN60 2940 2x6x300 2x6x800 900 2x2x3NE3340-8 6x300 6x800
26-1UE60 73 1x50 1x00 125 3NE3222 1x25 1x2
26-6UE60 79 1x50 1x00 160 3NE3224 1x25 1x2
28-0UF60 94 1x50 1x00 160 3NE3224 1x35 1x0
31-1UF60 129 2x35 2x0 200 3NE3225 2x16 2x4
31-3UG60 152 2x35 2x0 200 3NE3225 2x25 1x000
31-6UG60 186 2x50 2x00 250 3NE3227 2x35 1x4/0
32-0UG60 228 2x50 2x00 400 3NE3232-0B 2x35 2x0
32-3UG60 268 2x70 2x000 400 3NE3232-0B 2x50 2x00
33-0UJ60 353 2x300 2x800 500 3NE3234-0B 2x300 2x800
33-5UJ60 421 2x300 2x800 630 3NE3336 2x300 2x800
34-5UJ60 538 2x300 2x800 710 3NE3337-8 2x300 2x800
35-7UK60 678 4x300 4x800 450 2x3NE3333 2x300 2x800
36-5UK60 774 4x300 4x800 500 2x3NE3334-0B 4x300 4x800
38-6UK60 1023 4x300 4x800 630 2x3NE3336 4x300 4x800
41-1UL60 1285 6x300 6x800 800 2x3NE3338-8 4x300 4x800
41-2UL60 1464 6x300 6x800 900 2x3NE3340-8 6x300 6x800
41-4UQ60 1666 6x300 6x800 630 2x2x3NE3336 6x300 6x800
41-6UQ60 1880 8x300 8x800 630 2x2x3NE3336 6x300 6x800
41-4UM60 1666 6x300 6x800 630 2x2x3NE3336 6x300 6x800
41-6UM60 1880 8x300 8x800 630 2x2x3NE3336 6x300 6x800
42-1UN60 2440 2x6x300 2x6x800 800 2x2x3NE3338-8 2x4x300 2x4x800
42-3UN60 2785 2x6x300 2x6x800 900 2x2x3NE3340-8 2x6x300 2x6x800

26-0WF60 71 1x25 1x2 125 3NE3222 1x25 1x2
28-2WF60 98 1x50 1x00 160 3NE3224 1x35 1x0
31-0WG60 115 1x70 1x000 200 3NE3225 1x50 1x00
31-2WG60 140 2x35 1x0 200 3NE3225 2x25 1x2
31-5WG60 173 2x50 1x00 315 3NE3230-0B 2x25 2x2
31-7WG60 204 2x50 1x00 315 3NE3230-0B 2x25 2x2
32-1WG60 248 2x70 2x000 400 3NE3232-0B 2x50 2x00
33-0WJ60 353 2x300 2x800 500 3NE3234-0B 2x300 2x800
33-5WJ60 421 2x300 2x800 630 3NE3336 2x300 2x800
34-5WJ60 538 2x300 2x800 710 3NE3337-8 2x300 2x800
35-7WK60 678 4x300 4x800 450 2x3NE3333 2x300 2x800
36-5WK60 774 4x300 4x800 500 2x3NE3334-0B 4x300 4x800
38-6WK60 1023 4x300 4x800 630 2x3NE3336 4x300 4x800
41-1WL60 1285 6x300 6x800 800 2x3NE3338-8 4x300 4x800
41-2WL60 1464 6x300 6x800 900 2x3NE3340-8 6x300 6x800
41-4WQ60 1666 6x300 6x800 630 2x2x3NE3336 6x300 6x800
41-6WQ60 1880 8x300 8x800 630 2x2x3NE3336 6x300 6x800
41-4WM60 1666 6x300 6x800 630 2x2x3NE3336 6x300 6x800
41-6WM60 1880 8x300 8x800 630 2x2x3NE3336 6x300 6x800
42-1WN60 2440 2x6x300 2x6x800 800 2x2x3NE3338-8
42-3WN60 2785 2x6x300 2x6x800 900 2x2x3NE3340-8
AWG: American Wire Gauge (for cross-sections up to 120 mm²)

MCM: Mille Circular Mil (for cross-sections from 120 mm²)
Table 7-1 Conductor cross-sections, fuses
NOTE The connection cross-sections are determined for copper cables at

40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature and cables with a permissible
operating temperature at the conductor of 70 °C (in accordance with
DIN VDE 0298-4 / 08.03).
If DC fuses are integrated on units with rated DC voltages of 510 V to
930 V, additional fuses are then not necessary on the infeed side,
provided that the supply cables to the DC bus are laid in a short-circuit
proof manner and that overloading by other consumers can be
excluded.
In the case of units of types J, K, L, M, N and Q, the fuses are an
integral part of the unit.
In the case of units of types E, F and G, they are optional (L30).
The connection lengths to the rectifier unit, on systems also between
the inverters, should be kept as short as possible. Ideally, they are
designed as low-inductance busbars.
Possible connection Type Order number Max. connection Screw Tightening

cross-sections, cross-sections connection torque
screw connection,
tightening torque mm2 to AWG Nm lbf ft
VDE
E 6SE703_-__E_0 2 x 70 2 x 00 M10 25 18
F 6SE703_-__F_0 2 x 70 2 x 00 M10 25 18
G 6SE703_-__G_0 2 x 150 2 x 300 M12 50 37
J 6SE703_-__J_0 2 x 300 2 x 800 M12 / M16 50 / 115 37 / 85
K 6SE703_-__K_0 4 x 300 4 x 800 M12 / M16 50 / 115 37 / 85
L 6SE704_-__L_0 4 x 300 4 x 800 M12 50 37
Table 7-2 Maximum connectable cross-sections, tightening torque
Protective The protective conductor has to be connected on both the input and the
conductor motor side and must be dimensioned in accordance with the power
connection connections.
NOTE type G The 230 V fan must be supplied with AC 230 V externally via terminal
7.2 Auxiliary power supply, main contactor

Types E, F, G: The 5-pole terminal strip is used for connecting up a 24 V voltage
X9 - external supply and a main or bypass contactor.
DC 24 V supply, The voltage supply is required if the inverter is connected via a main
main contactor contactor or bypass contactor.
control
The connections for the contactor control are floating.
The position of the terminal strip can be seen from the connection
overviews.
Terminal Designation Meaning Range
5 Main contactor control Main contactor control AC 230 V
5
4 4 Main contactor control Main contactor control 1 kVA
3 3 n.c. Not connected
2
2 0V Reference potential 0V
1
1 +24 V (in) 24 V voltage supply DC24 V ... DC30 V
For current
requirement see
section “Technical
Data“
Connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)

Table 7-3 Connection of external DC 24 V aux. voltage supply and main contactor
control (types E, F, G)
NOTE The excitation coil of the main contactor has to be damped with
overvoltage limiters, e.g. RC element.
WARNING The external 24 V voltage supply must meet the requirements for safety
separation (PELV electrical circuit = Protective Extra Low Voltage).
Type J – N: The 5-pole terminal strip is used for connecting up a 24 V voltage

X9 - external supply and a main or bypass contactor.
DC 24 V supply, The connection base is located easily accessibly on the DIN rail below
main contactor the slide-in unit of the electronics box.
control
The voltage supply is required if the inverter is connected up via a main
or bypass contactor.
The connections for the contactor control are floating.
Terminal Designation Description Range
5 Main contactor Main contactor control AC 230 V
5
control
4
3 4 Main contactor Main contactor control 1 kVA
control
2
1 3 n.c. Not connected
2 0V Reference potential 0V
DC24 V ... DC30 V
1 +24 V (in) 24 V voltage supply For current
requirement see
section “Technical
Data”
Table 7-4 Connection of external DC 24 V aux. voltage supply and main contactor
control (type J - N)
NOTE The excitation coil of the main contactor has to be damped with
overvoltage limiters, e.g. RC element.
The 230 V fan has to be supplied with AC230 V externally. The
connecting points are located on the fuse-disconnectors on the right
next to the DIN rail of X9.
WARNING The external 24 V voltage supply must meet the requirements for safety
separation (PELV electrical circuit = Protective Extra Low Voltage).
7.3 Control connections

Standard In the basic version the unit has the following control connections on
connections the CUVC control board:
♦ Serial interface (RS232 / RS485) for PC or OP1S
♦ A serial interface (USS bus, RS485)
♦ A control terminal strip for connecting up a HTL unipolar pulse
encoder and a motor temperature sensor (PTC / KTY84)
♦ Two control terminal strips with digital and analog inputs and
outputs.
WARNING Before the control cables and encoder cables are connected or
disconnected, the unit must be disconnected from the supply (24 V
electronic power supply and DC link/line voltage)!
If this measure is not observed, this can result in defects on the
encoder. A defective encoder can cause uncontrolled axis movements.
WARNING The external 24 V infeed and all circuits connected to the control
terminals must meet the requirements for safety separation as
stipulated in EN 50178 (PELV circuit = Protective Extra Low Voltage).
NOTE The ground of the control connections is connected inside the unit with
the protective conductor (ground) – (PELV electrical circuit).
X108
S1
S2
S3/3,4
S3/1,2
X101
X102
X103
S4/4,5,6
S4/1,2,3
Fig. 7-4 View of the CUVC
NOTE Switches have been changed on CUVCs from 11/2005:

♦ S1, S2, S3: Slide switch design
For contact assignment refer to section "Switch settings for slide
switch design"
♦ Switches S4 or S41 and S42 are fitted. The contact assignment
differs depending on the switch design (see section "Switch
settings").
X101 Controller Slot A

1 P24V Micro- Slot C
Aux. power controller Slot D
supply 2 M24
150 mA Slot E
3 Slot F
Out Slot G
Out In In
Out PMU X300
4 Out
Bidirectional Out/In
digital inputs- 5V In
In
and outputs 5 Out
Iout ≤ 20 mA 24V In
6 Out
In
4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs
Outputs
7 5V
24V In
8 5V
Digital inputs 24V In
Ri = 3,4 kΩ 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
9 5V
RS485P
RS485N
RS232 TxD
BOOT
RS232 RxD
n.c.
P5V
24V In
Inputs
RS485P
10
Serial interface 2
USS (RS485) RS485N UART BOOT
11
Reference potential RS485 12
S2 *)
+5V
X102 Switch for USS bus connection
Reference voltage P10 AUX
P10 V / N10 V 13
≥1
I ≤ 5 mA N10 AUX
14
S1 *)
15
S3 A
In
Analog input 1 D +5V
1 2 *) AI 1 Switch for USS bus connection
(non-floating)
11 bit + sign
16
U: Rin = 60 kΩ X103
I: Rin = 250 Ω
17 Tacho M
(Close S3) S3 A 23
In
Analog input 2 D
Track A Pulse
(non-floating) 3 4 *) AI 2 24 encoder
18 A Track B I≤190 mA
AO 1 S4
1*)
S 25
19
D 3 -10...+10 V I Zero pulse
26
Analog output 1 A 0...+20 mA C
2 Control
20 M 27
10 bit + sign S4
AO 2 Tacho P15
U: I ≤ 5 mA 4*) 28
D 6 -10...+10 V
I: R ≤ 500 Ω 21
A 0...+20 mA Mot. temp BS
Analog output 2 5 29 Motor
22 M temperature
Mot.temp
30 sensor
KTY84
or PTC
thermistor
*) Contact assignment according to switch design, see section "Switch settings"
Fig. 7-5 Overview of the standard connections
X101 – Control The following connections are provided on the control terminal strip:
terminal strip ♦ 4 optionally parameterizable digital inputs and outputs
♦ 3 digital inputs
♦ 24 V aux. voltage supply (max. 150 mA) for the inputs and outputs
♦ 1 serial interface SCom2 (USS / RS485)
WARNING If the digital inputs are supplied by an external 24 V voltage supply, it

must be referred to ground terminal X101.2. Terminal X101.1 (P24
AUX) must not be connected to the external 24 V supply.

1 P24 AUX Aux. voltage supply DC 24 V / 150 mA
2 M24 AUX Reference potential 0V
3 DIO1 Digital input/output 1
4 DIO2 Digital input/output 2 24 V, 10 mA / 20 mA;
5 DIO3 Digital input/output 3 L ≤ 3 V, H ≥ 13 V
6 DIO4 Digital input/output 4
7 DI5 Digital input 5
24 V, 10 mA;
L ≤ 3 V, H ≥ 13 V
10 RS485 P USS bus connection SCom2 RS485
11 RS485 N USS bus connection SCom2 RS485
12 M RS485 Reference potential RS485
Connectable cross-section: 0.14 mm² to 1.5 mm² (AWG 16)

Terminal 1 is at the top when installed.
Table 7-5 Control terminal strip X101
X102 – Control The following connections are provided on the control terminal strip:
terminal strip ♦ 10 V aux. voltage (max. 5 mA) for the supply of an external
potentiometer
♦ 2 analog inputs, can be used as current or voltage input
♦ 2 analog outputs, can be used as current or voltage output
13 P10 V +10 V supply for ext. +10 V ±1.3 %,
potentiometer Imax = 5 mA
14 N10 V -10 V supply for ext. -10 V ±1.3 %,
potentiometer Imax = 5 mA
15 AI1+ Analog input 1 + 11 bit + sign
16 M AI1 Ground, analog input 1 Voltage:
17 AI2+ Analog input 2 + ± 10 V / Ri = 60 kΩ
18 M AI2 Ground, analog input 2 Current: Rin = 250 Ω
19 AO1 Analog output 1 10 bit + sign
20 M AO1 Ground, analog output 1 Voltage:
21 AO2 Analog output 2 ± 10 V / Imax = 5 mA
22 M AO2 Ground, analog output 2 Current: 0...20 mA
R ≥ 500 Ω

X103 – Connection The connection for an incremental encoder (HTL unipolar) is provided
of HTL incremental on the control terminal strip.
encoder
23 - VSS Ground for power supply
24 Track A Connection for track A
25 Track B Connection for track B HTL unipolar;
L ≤ 3 V, H ≥ 8 V
26 Zero pulse Connection for zero pulse
27 CTRL Connection for control track
28 + VSS Power supply pulse 15 V
encoder Imax = 190 mA
29 + Temp Plus (+) connection
KTY84/PTC KTY84: 0...200 °C
30 - Temp Minus (-) connection PTC: Rcold ≤ 1.5 kΩ
KTY84/PTC

X300 - Serial Either an OP1S or a PC can be connected up via the 9-pole Sub D
interface socket.
Pin Name Meaning Range
1 n.c. Not connected
5 1 2 RS232 RxD Receive data via RS232 RS232

3 RS485 P Data via RS485 RS485
4 Boot Control signal for software Digital signal, low
9 6 update active
5 M5V Reference potential to P5V 0V
6 P5V 5 V aux. voltage supply +5 V, Imax = 200 mA
7 RS232 TxD Transmit data via RS232 RS232
8 RS485 N Data via RS485 RS485
9 M_RS232/485 Digital ground (choked)
Table 7-8 Serial interface X300
Switch settings for Switch Meaning

DipFix switch
design S1 SCom1 (X300): Bus terminating resistor
• open • Resistor open
• closed • Resistor closed
S2 SCom2 (X101/10,11): Bus terminating resistor
• open • Resistor open
• closed • Resistor closed
S3 (1,2) AI1: Changeover current/voltage input
• open • Voltage input
• closed • Current input
S3 (3,4) AI2: Changeover current/voltage input
• open • Voltage input
• closed • Current input
S4 (1,2,3) AO1: Changeover current/voltage output
• Jumper 1, 3 • Voltage output
• Jumper 2, 3 • Current output
S4 (4,5,6) AO2: Changeover current/voltage output
• Jumper 4, 6 • Voltage output
• Jumper 5, 6 • Current output
Switch settings for Switch Contact Status Meaning

slide switch design
S1 1-4 open Bus terminating resistor open
S1 1-4 closed Bus terminating resistor closed
S2 2-3 open Bus terminating resistor open
S2 2-3 closed Bus terminating resistor closed
S3 1-4 open AI1: Voltage input
S3 1-4 closed AI1: Current input
S3 2-3 open AI2: Voltage input
S3 2-3 closed AI2: Current input
S41 1-2 closed AO1: Current output
S41 2-3 closed AO1: Voltage output
S42 1-2 closed AO2: Current output
S42 2-3 closed AO2:Voltage output
NOTE Contacts S41 (4, 5, 6) and contacts S42 (4, 5, 6) are not used.
X533 - Safe stop The safe stop option comprises the safety relay and the connecting
option terminals for relay triggering and a checkback contact.

1 Contact 1 Checkback "safe stop" DC 20 V – 30 V
2 Contact 2 Checkback "safe stop" 1A
3 Control input Rated resistance of field coil DC 20 V – 30 V
"safe stop" ≥ 823 Ω ± 10 % at 20 °C max. operating
frequency: 6/min
4 P24 DC Supply voltage "safe stop" DC 24 V /
30 mA

Terminal 4 is at the front when installed.
Table 7-9 Terminal assignment for the "safe stop" option
X533
X533
Fig. 7-6 Types E and F Fig. 7-7 Type G
X533
U V W
Fig. 7-8 Types ≥ J
The field coil of the safety relay is connected at one end to the
grounded electronics frame. When the field coil is supplied via an
external 24 V supply, its negative pole must be connected to ground
potential. The external 24 V supply must comply with the requirements
for PELV circuits to EN 50178 (DIN VDE 0160).
In the shipped state, a jumper is inserted between terminals 3 and 4.
The jumper must be removed before the "SAFE STOP" function can be
used and an external control for selecting the function connected.
If the safety relay is supplied via the internal supply at X533:4, the
external 24 V supply must deliver at least 22 V at terminal X9:1/2 to
ensure that the relay picks up reliably (internal voltage drop).
Terminal strip
- X533
1 2 3 4
P15
Optocoupler /
fibre optics
supply
The checkback contacts of the safety relay are capable of at least

100,000 switching cycles at the specified load (30 V DC / 1 A). The
mechanical service life is about 106 switching cycles. The safety relay is
an important component in ensuring reliability and availability of the
machine. For this reason, the pcb with the safety relay must be
replaced in the case of malfunction. In this case, the unit must be
returned for repair or replaced. Function checks must be carried out at
regular intervals, which must be defined in compliance with Employer's
Liability Insurance Regulation BGV A1 §39, para. 3. Accordingly,
function checks must be performed as required by the relevant service
conditions, but at least once a year and additionally after initial
commissioning and any modification and/or maintenance work.
P24
Request protective
device enable S2
open
K2
-Y1
Emerg.
closed
stop
-S1
K2 Mains
Main switch -Q1
A1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 13 23 31 47 57 A1 Y10 Y11 Y12 Y21 Y22 13 23 31 47 57
3TK2828 3TK2828 K1
A A
Y33 Y34 PE 14 24 32 48 58 Y33 Y34 PE 14 24 32 48 58
2 2
Reset
S3 U1 V1 W1
K1 X533 Option K80
1
2
4 P2 PV
3 4
X101
X OFF3
Y n=0
CU control
board
SIMOVERT
-K1 -K2 MASTERDRIVES
OFF1
U2 V2 W2
M M
3
X: Binary input, connect to OFF3
e. g. X101.8 --> P558 = 21
Y: Binary output, connect to "Comparison value
reached"
e. g. X101.6 --> P654 = 120; P796 = 0 (comparison value)
Fig. 7-9 Sample application of "safe stop" function with contactor safety
combination for monitoring a moving protective device in Safety Category
3 to EN 954-1
All external cables relevant to the safety function are protected, e.g.
installed in cable ducts, to preclude the possibility of short circuits.
Cables must be installed in compliance with the requirements of
EN 60204-1, Section 14.
In the circuit shown in Fig. 7-9, the tumbler does not release the moving
protective device until the drive has stopped. It may be possible to omit
the tumbler if the risk assessment of the machine deems this to be
safe. In this case, the NC contact of the protective device is connected
directly to terminals Y11 and Y12 and electromagnet Y1 is omitted.
Binary input X is negated with signal "OFF3", i.e. at 24 V, the converter
decelerates the motor to zero speed along the parameterized
deceleration ramp. The converter signals zero speed via binary output
Y, thus energizing relay K2.
Once the motor has stopped, the safety relay in the converter is opened
and the coil of main contactor K1 remains at 24 V via the checkback
contact. If contacts in the safety relay are sticking, the checkback
contacts do not close and the safety combination on the right
deenergizes main contactor K1 via delayed contacts 47/48 when the
set delay period expires.
7.4 Fan supply

X18 – Fan supply Terminal Designation Meaning Range
1 N Fan supply (neutral
conductor )
2 -
3 Internally assigned Fan N via fuse F1
4 -
5 L Fan supply (phase) 230 V ± 15 % /
50/60 Hz
6 -
7 Internally assigned Fan L via fuse F2
8 -
9 -
10 Internally assigned
NOTE The 1AC 230 V fan supply X18/1 must be grounded (neutral conductor
N connected to protective conductor PE).
7.5 Fan fuses

Line voltage DC 270 V to 310 V
Order No. Fan Fuse
6SE70.. (F1 / F2)
31-0RE60 FNQ-R-2
31-3RE60 FNQ-R-2
31-6RE60 FNQ-R-2
32-0RE60 FNQ-R-2
Manufacturer: FNQ-R Bussmann

Order No. Fan Fuse Fan Fuse
6SE70.. (F1 / F2) (F101 / F102)
31-0TE60 FNQ-R-2
31-0TE60-1AA1
31-2TF60 FNQ-R-2
31-2TF60-1AA1
31-5TF60 FNQ-R-2
31-5TF60-1AA1
31-8TF60 FNQ-R-2
31-8TF60-1AA1
32-1TG60 FNQ-R-5
32-1TG60-1AA1
32-6TG60 FNQ-R-5
32-6TG60-1AA1
33-2TG60 FNQ-R-5
33-2TG60-1AA1
33-7TG60 FNQ-R-5
33-7TG60-1AA1
35-1TJ60 FNQ-R-5
35-1TJ60-1AA0
36-0TJ60 FNQ-R-5
36-0TJ60-1AA0
37-0TJ/K60 FNM-10
37-0TJ/K60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
38-6TK60 FNM-10
38-6TK60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
41-1TK60 TRM 30
41-1TK60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
41-3TL60 TRM 30
41-3TL60-1AA0 FNQ-R5

6SE70.. (F1 / F2) (F101 / F102)
41-6TQ/M60 FNM-10
41-6TQ/M60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
42-1TQ60 TRM 30
42-1TQ60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
42-5TN60 TRM 30
42-5TN60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
Manufacturer: FNQ-R-, FNM- Bussmann
TRM Gould Shawmut

6SE70.. (F1 / F2) (F101 / F102)
26-1UE60 FNQ-R-2
26-1UE60-1AA1
26-6UE60 FNQ-R-2
26-6UE60-1AA1
28-0UF60 FNQ-R-2
28-0UF60-1AA1
31-1UF60 FNQ-R-2
31-1UF60-1AA1
31-3UG60 FNQ-R-5
31-3UG60-1AA1
31-6UG60 FNQ-R-5
31-6UG60-1AA1
32-0UG60 FNQ-R-5
32-0UG60-1AA1
32-3UG60 FNQ-R-5
32-3UG60-1AA1
33-0UJ60 FNQ-R-5
33-0UJ60-1AA0
33-5UJ60 FNQ-R-5
33-5UJ60-1AA0
34-5UJ60 FNQ-R-5
34-5UJ60-1AA0
35-7UK60 FNM-10
35-7UK60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
36-5UK60 FNM-10
36-5UK60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
38-6UK60 TRM 30
38-6UK60-1AA0 FNQ-R5
41-1UL60 TRM 30
41-1UL60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5

6SE70.. (F1 / F2) (F101 / F102)
41-2UL60 TRM 30
41-2UL60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
41-4UQ/M60 TRM 30
41-4UQ/M60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
41-6UQ/M60 TRM 30
41-6UQ/M60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
42-1UN60 TRM 30
42-1UN60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
42-3UN60 TRM 30
42-3UN60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
TRM Gould Shawmut

6SE70.. (F1 / F2) (F101 / F102)
26-0WF60 FNQ-R-2
26-0WF60-1AA1
28-2WF60 FNQ-R-2
28-2WF60-1AA1
31-0WG60 FNQ-R-5
31-0WG60-1AA1
31-2WG60 FNQ-R-5
31-2WG60-1AA1
31-5WG60 FNQ-R-5
31-5WG60-1AA1
31-7WG60 FNQ-R-5
31-7WG60-1AA1
32-1WG60 FNQ-R-5
32-1WG60-1AA1
33-0WJ60 FNQ-R-5
33-0WJ60-1AA0
33-5WJ60 FNQ-R-5
33-5WJ60-1AA0
34-5WJ60 FNQ-R-5
34-5WJ60-1AA0
35-7WK60 FNM-10
35-7WK60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
36-5WK60 FNM-10
36-5WK60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
38-6WK60 TRM 30
38-6WK60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5

6SE70.. (F1 / F2) (F101 / F102)
41-1WL60 TRM 30
41-1WL60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
41-2WL60 TRM 30
41-2WL60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
41-4WQ/M60 TRM 30
41-4WQ/M60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
41-6WQ/M60 TRM 30
41-6WQ/M60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
42-1WN60 TRM 30
42-1WN60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
42-3WN60 TRM 30
42-3WN60-1AA0 FNQ-R-5
TRM Gould Shawmut
7.6 MASTER-SLAVE connection for parallel inverters

The units of types M, N and Q with degree of protection IP00 must be
assembled as indicated in the planning guide.
The control connections between master and slave must then be made.
Procedure:
♦ Carefully lay the control cables to the master cabinet through the
cable channel.
♦ Insert connectors -X238 / -X234 / -X32 / -X42.
♦ Insert fiber-optic cables U41 / U51 / U61 / U42 / U43 / U52 / U53 /
U62 / U63 on the IPI in the master.
NOTE Inserting the fiber-optic cables:

Insert the fiber-optic cables as far as they will go (approx. 16 mm, white
mark) and screw the cap nut tight.
CAUTION You must not make kinks in fiber-optic cables!

Bending radius for fiber-optic cables ≥ 30 mm.
07.2005 Parameterization
8 Parameterization
It is possible to parameterize the units of the SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES series by various methods of parameter input. Every
unit can be set via the dedicated parameterizing unit (PMU) without the
need to use additional components.
Each unit is supplied with the user software DriveMonitor and
comprehensive electronic documentation on a CD. In the case of
installation on a standard PC the units can be parameterized via the
serial interface of the PC. The software provides extensive parameter
aids and a prompted start-up function.
The unit can be further parameterized by entering parameters with the
OP1S manual operator panel and via a controller at the field bus level
(e.g. Profibus).
8.1 Parameter menus

Parameters with related functions are compiled in menus for structuring
the parameter set stored in the units. A menu thus represents a
selection out of the entire supply of parameters of the unit.
It is possible for one parameter to belong to several menus. The
parameter list indicates which individual menus a parameter belongs to.
Assignment is effected via the menu number allocated to each menu.
SIEMENS AG 6SE7087-6KN60
Parameterization 07.2005
Menu level 1
Select via Menu level 2 Menu level 3
P60 Menu Select (only on OP1S) (only on OP1S)
User parameters General parameters SCom1/SCom2
Terminals Field bus interfaces
Communication SIMOLINK
P60 Parameter menu
Control and status words SCB/SCI
Setpoint channel
Motor/encoder Motor data

Fixed settings
Encoder data
Control/gating unit Position control

Quick
parameterization Speed control
Current control
Board Sequence control
configuration V/f open-loop control
Gating unit
Drive setting
Download Diagnostics Faults/alarms
Messages/displays
Upread/free access Functions
Trace
Power section Releases Basic positioner 1)

definition
Synchronism 1)
Free blocks
Positioning 1)
Technology 1) Setting up/MDI 1)
By entering a password in P359,

access to the menus in the gray
shaded area can be prohibited to
unauthorized persons
1) only MASTERDRIVES Motion Control

P358 Key P359 Lock
Fig. 8-1 Parameter menus
Menu levels The parameter menus have several menu levels. The first level
contains the main menus. These are effective for all sources of
parameter inputs (PMU, OP1S, DriveMonitor, field bus interfaces).
The main menus are selected in parameter P60 Menu Selection.
Examples:
P060 = 0 "User parameters" menu selected
P060 = 1 "Parameter menu" selected
...
P060 = 8 "Power section definition" menu selected
Menu levels 2 and 3 enable the parameter set to be more extensively
structured. They are used for parameterizing the units with the OP1S
operator control panel.
Main menus
P060 Menu Description
0 User parameters • Freely configurable menu

1 Parameter menu • Contains complete parameter set
• More extensive structure of the functions achieved by using
an OP1S operator control panel
2 Fixed settings • Used to perform a parameter reset to a factory or user setting
3 Quick • Used for quick parameterization with parameter modules
parameterization • When selected, the unit switches to status 5 "Drive setting"
4 Board configuration • Used for configuring the optional boards
• When selected, the unit switches to status 4 "Board
configuration"
5 Drive setting • Used for detailed parameterization of important motor,
encoder and control data
• When selected, the unit switches to status 5 "Drive setting"
6 Download • Used to download parameters from an OP1S, a PC or an
automation unit
• When selected, the unit switches to status 21 "Download"
7 Upread/free access • Contains the complete parameter set and is used for free
access to all parameters without being restricted by further
menus
• Enables all parameters to be upread/upload by an OP1S, PC
or automation unit
8 Power section • Used to define the power section (only necessary for units of
definition the Compact and chassis type)
• When selected, the unit switches to status 0 "Power section
definition"
Table 8-1 Main menus
User parameters In principle, parameters are firmly assigned to the menus. However, the
"User parameters" menu has a special status. Parameters assigned to
this menu are not fixed, but can be changed. You are thus able to put
together the parameters required for your application in this menu and
structure them according to your needs. The user parameters can be
selected via P360 (Select UserParam).
Lock and key In order to prevent undesired parameterization of the units and to
protect your know-how stored in the parameterization, it is possible to
restrict access to the parameters by defining your own passwords with
the parameters:
♦ P358 key and
♦ P359 lock.
8.2 Changeability of parameters

The parameters stored in the units can only be changed under certain
conditions. The following preconditions must be satisfied before
parameters can be changed:
Preconditions Remarks
• Either a function parameter or a BICO Visualization parameters
parameter must be involved (identified (identified by lower-case letters
by upper-case letters in the parameter in the parameter number)
number). cannot be changed.
• Parameter access must be granted for Release is given in P053
the source from which the parameters Parameter access.
are to be changed.
• A menu must be selected in which the The menu assignment is
parameter to be changed is contained. indicated in the parameter list
for every parameter.
• The unit must be in a status which The statuses in which it is
permits parameters to be changed. possible to change parameters
are specified in the parameter
list.
Table 8-2 Preconditions for being able to change parameters
NOTE The current status of the units can be interrogated in parameter r001.
Examples Status (r001) P053 Result

"Ready for ON" (09) 2 P222 Src n(act) can only be changed via the PMU
"Ready for ON" (09) 6 P222 Src n(act) can be changed via the PMU and
SCom1 (e.g. OP1S)
"Operation" (14) 6 P222 Src n(act) cannot be changed on account of
the drive status
Table 8-3 Influence of drive status (r001) and parameter access (P053) on the
changeability of a parameter
8.3 Parameter input with DriveMonitor
NOTE Please refer to the online help for detailed information on

DriveMonitor ( button or F1 key).
8.3.1 Installation and connection
8.3.1.1 Installation
A CD is included with the devices of the MASTERDRIVES Series when

they are delivered. The operating tool supplied on the CD (DriveMoni-
tor) is automatically installed from this CD. If "automatic notification on
change" is activated for the CD drive on the PC, user guidance starts
when you insert the CD and takes you through installation of
DriveMonitor. If this is not the case, start file "Autoplay.exe" in the root
directory of the CD.
8.3.1.2 Connection
There are two ways of connecting a PC to a device of the SIMOVERT

MASTERDRIVES Series via the USS interface. The devices of the
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES Series have both an RS232 and an
RS485 interface.
RS232 interface The serial interface that PCs are equipped with by default functions as
an RS232 interface. This interface is not suitable for bus operation and
is therefore only intended for operation of a SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES device.
1 1 X300:
6 6 1 Ground
2 2 2 RxD (RS232)
7 7 3 Rx+/Tx+ (RS485)
3 3 4
8 8 5 Ground
4 4
9 6 +5V (OP1S)
9
5 5 7 TxD (RS232)
8 Rx-/Tx- (RS485)
9 Ground
To PC COMx Device side
socket -X300 (compact PLUS -X103)
9-pin SUB-D connector
Fig. 8-2 Connecting cable for connecting PC COM(1-4) to SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES X300
NOTICE DriveMonitor must not be operated via the Sub-D socket X300 if the
SST1 interface parallel to it is already being used for another purpose,
e.g. bus operation with SIMATIC as the master.
RS485 interface The RS485 interface is multi-point capable and therefore suitable for
bus operation. You can use it to connect 31 SIMOVERT
MASTERDRIVES with a PC. On the PC, either an integrated RS485
interface or an RS232 ↔ RS485 interface converter is necessary. On
the device, an RS485 interface is integrated into the -X300 (compact
PLUS -X103) connection. For the cable: see pin assignment -X300 and
device documentation of the interface converter.
8.3.2 Establishing the connection between DriveMonitor and the device
8.3.2.1 Setting the USS interface
You can configure the interface with menu Tools Æ ONLINE Settings.
Fig. 8-3 Online settings
The following settings (Fig. 8-4) are possible:

♦ Tab card "Bus Type", options
USS (operation via serial interface)
Profibus DP (only if DriveMonitor is operated under Drive ES).
♦ Tab card "Interface"
You can enter the required COM interface of the PC (COM1 to
COM4) and the required baudrate here.
NOTE Set the baudrate to the baudrate parameterized in SIMOVERT

MASTERDRIVES (P701) (factory setting 9600 baud).
Further settings: operating mode of the bus in RS485 operation;
setting according to the description of the interface converter
RS232/RS485
♦ Tab card "Extended"
Request retries and Response timeout; here you can increase the
values already set if communication errors occur frequently.
Fig. 8-4 Interface configuration
8.3.2.2 Starting the USS bus scan
DriveMonitor starts with an empty drive window. Via the menu "Set up
an ONLINE connection..." the USS bus can be scanned for connected
devices:
Fig. 8-5 Starting the USS bus scan
NOTE The "Set up an online connection” menu is only valid from Version 5.2
onwards.
Fig. 8-6 Search for online drives
During the search the USS bus is scanned with the set baudrate only.
The baud rate can be changed via "Tools Æ ONLINE Settings", see
section 8.3.2.1.
8.3.2.3 Creating a parameter set
With menu FileÆ New Æ... you can create a new drive for
parameterization (see Fig. 8-7). The system creates a download file
(*.dnl), in which the drive characteristic data (type, device version) are
stored. You can create the download file on the basis of an empty
parameter set or the factory setting.
Fig. 8-7 Creating a new drive
Based on factory setting:

♦ The parameter list is preassigned with the factory setting values
Empty parameter set:
♦ For compilation of individually used parameters
If the parameters of a parameter set that has already been created

have to be changed, this can be done by calling the corresponding
download file via the “FileÆ Open” menu function. The last four drives
can be opened via “Parameter sets last dealt with”.
When you create a new drive, the window "Drive Properties" (Fig. 8-8)
opens. Here you must enter the following data:
♦ In dropdown list box "Device type", select the type of device (e.g.
MASTERDRIVES MC). You can only select the devices stored.
♦ In dropdown list box "Device version", you can select the software
version of the device. You can generate databases for (new)
software versions that are not listed when you start online
parameterization.
♦ You must only specify the bus address of the drive during online
operation (switchover with button Online/Offline)
NOTE The specified bus address must be the same as that of the
parameterized SST bus address in SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES
(P700).
No bus address is assigned to the drive with the button "Disconnect
network connection".
NOTE Field "Number of PCD" has no special significance for the

parameterization of MASTERDRIVES and should be left at "2".
If the value is changed, it must be/remain ensured that the setting value
in the program matches the value in parameter P703 of the drive at all
times.
Fig. 8-8 Create file; Drive properties
After confirming the drive properties with ok you have to enter the name
and storage location of the download file to be created.
8.3.3 Parameterization
8.3.3.1 Structure of the parameter lists, parameterization with DriveMonitor
Parameterization using the parameter list is basically the same as

parameterization using PMU (See Chapter 6 "Parameterizating Steps").
The parameter list provides the following advantages:
♦ Simultaneous visibility of a larger number of parameters
♦ Text display for parameter names, index number, index text,
parameter value, binectors, and connectors
♦ On a change of parameters: Display of parameter limits or possible
parameter values
The parameter list has the following structure:

Field Field Name Function
No.
1 P. Nr Here the parameter number is displayed. You can only change the field in
menu Free parameterization.
2 Name Display of the parameter name, in accordance with the parameter list
3 Ind Display of the parameter index for indexed parameters. To see more than
index 1, click on the [+] sign. The display is then expanded and all indices of
the parameter are displayed
4 Index text Meaning of the index of the parameter
5 Parameter Display of the current parameter value. You can change this by double-
value clicking on it or selecting and pressing Enter.
6 Dim Physical dimension of the parameter, if there is one
With buttons Offline, Online (RAM), Online (EEPROM) (Fig. 8-9 [1]) you
can switch modes. When you switch to online mode, device
identification is performed. If the configured device and the real device
do not match (device type, software version), an alarm appears. If an
unknown software version is recognized, the option of creating the
database is offered. (This process takes several minutes.)
Fig. 8-9 Drive window/parameter list
The DriveMonitor drive window has a directory tree for navigation

purposes (Fig. 8-9 [2]). You can deselect this additional operating tool
in menu View - Parameter selection.
The drive window contains all elements required for the

parameterization and operation of the connected device. In the lower
bar, the status of the connection with the device is displayed:
Connection and device ok
Connection ok, device in fault state
Connection ok, device in alarm state

Device is parameterized offline
No connection with the device can be established (only offline

parameterization possible).
NOTE If no connection with the device can be established because the device
does not physically exist or is not connected, you can perform offline
parameterization. To do so, you have to change to offline mode. In that
way, you can create an individually adapted download file, which you
can load into the device later.
Drive Navigator This is used to quickly access important functions of the DriveMonitor.
Settings for Drive Navigator under Tools -> Options (Fig. 8-11):
Fig. 8-10 Drive Navigator
Fig. 8-11 Options menu display
Toolbar of the Drive Navigator
= Assisted commissioning
= Direct to parameter list
= General diagnostics
= Save drive parameters to a file
= Download parameter file to drive
= Load standard application
= Assisted F01 technology COMM
= Basic positioner operating screens
8.3.3.2 General diagnostics
Via the Diagnostics Æ General diagnostics menu the following window

opens. This window gives a general overview of the active warnings
and faults and their history. Both the warning and the fault number as
well as plain text are displayed.
Fig. 8-12 General diagnostics
Via the Extended Diagnostics button you can reach the next
diagnostics window.
Fig. 8-13 Extended diagnostics
8.4 Parameter input via the PMU

The PMU parameterizing unit enables parameterization, operator
control and visualization of the converters and inverters directly on the
unit itself. It is an integral part of the basic units. It has a four-digit
seven-segment display and several keys.
The PMU is used with preference for parameterizing simple
applications requiring a small number of set parameters, and for quick
parameterization.
Raise key
Seven-segment display for:
Drive statuses
Reversing key Alarms and

faults
ON key
Toggle key Parameter numbers
OFF key
Parameter indices
Lower key
X300 Parameter values
Fig. 8-14 PMU parameterizing unit
Key Meaning Function

ON key • For energizing the drive (enabling motor activation).
• If there is a fault: For returning to fault display
OFF key • For de-energizing the drive by means of OFF1, OFF2 or OFF3
(P554 to 560) depending on parameterization.
Reversing key • For reversing the direction of rotation of the drive.
The function must be enabled by P571 and P572
Toggle key • For switching between parameter number, parameter index
and parameter value in the sequence indicated (command
becomes effective when the key is released).
• If fault display is active: For acknowledging the fault
Raise key For increasing the displayed value:
• Short press = single-step increase
• Long press = rapid increase
Lower key For lowering the displayed value:
• Short press = single-step decrease
• Long press = rapid decrease
Hold toggle key • If parameter number level is active: For jumping back and forth
and depress raise between the last selected parameter number and the
key operating display (r000)
• If fault display is active: For switching over to parameter
number level
• If parameter value level is active: For shifting the displayed
value one digit to the right if parameter value cannot be
displayed with 4 figures (left-hand figure flashes if there are
any further invisible figures to the left)
Hold toggle key • If parameter number level is active: For jumping directly to the
and depress lower operating display (r000)
key • If parameter value level is active: For shifting the displayed
value one digit to the left if parameter value cannot be
displayed with 4 figures (right-hand figure flashes if there are
any further invisible figures to the right)
Table 8-4 Operator control elements on the PMU
Toggle key As the PMU only has a four-digit seven-segment display, the 3
(P key) descriptive elements of a parameter
♦ Parameter number,
♦ Parameter index (if parameter is indexed) and
♦ Parameter value
cannot be displayed at the same time. For this reason, you have to
switch between the individual descriptive elements by depressing the
toggle key. After the desired level has been selected, adjustment can
be made using the raise key or the lower key.
With the toggle key, you can change Parameter number
over:
• from the parameter number to the P
P
parameter index
• from the parameter index to the
parameter value Parameter Parameter
index value
• from the parameter value to the
parameter number P
If the parameter is not indexed, you
can jump directly to the parameter
value.
NOTE If you change the value of a parameter, this change generally becomes
effective immediately. It is only in the case of acknowledgement
parameters (marked in the parameter list by an asterisk ‘ * ’) that the
change does not become effective until you change over from the
parameter value to the parameter number.
Parameter changes made using the PMU are always safely stored in
the EEPROM (protected in case of power failure) once the toggle key
has been depressed.
Example The following example shows the individual operator control steps to be
carried out on the PMU for a parameter reset to factory setting.
Set P053 to 0002 and grant parameter access for PMU

∇ ∇
Ê P Ì Ê Ì Ê Ì Ê P Ì
P053 0000 0001 0002 P053
Select P060
∇
Ê Ì
P053 P060
Set P060 to 0002 and select "Fixed settings" menu

∇
Ê P Ì Ê Ì Ê P Ì
P060 1 2 P060
Select P970
∇ ∇
Ê Ì Ê Ì
P060 P366 P970
Set P970 to 0000 and start parameter reset
Ê P Ì Ê ∇ Ì Ê P Ì
P970 1 0 °009
8.5 Parameter input via the OP1S

The operator control panel (OP1S) is an optional input/output device
which can be used for parameterizing and starting up the units. Plain-
text displays greatly facilitate parameterization.
The OP1S has a non-volatile memory and can permanently store
complete sets of parameters. It can therefore be used for archiving sets
of parameters, but first the parameter sets must be read out (upread)
from the units. Stored parameter sets can also be transferred
(downloaded) to other units.
The OP1S and the unit to be operated communicate with each other via
a serial interface (RS485) using the USS protocol. During
communication, the OP1S assumes the function of the master whereas
the connected units function as slaves.
The OP1S can be operated at baud rates of 9.6 kBd and 19.2 kBd, and
is capable of communicating with up to 32 slaves (addresses 0 to 31). It
can therefore be used in a point-to-point link (e.g. during initial
parameterization) or within a bus configuration.
The plain-text displays can be shown in one of five different languages
(German, English, Spanish, French, Italian). The language is chosen by
selecting the relevant parameter for the slave in question.
Order numbers Components Order Number

OP1S 6SE7090-0XX84-2FK0
Connecting cable 3 m 6SX7010-0AB03
Connecting cable 5 m 6SX7010-0AB05
Adapter for installation in cabinet door incl. 5 m cable 6SX7010-0AA00
LCD (4 lines x 16 characters)
9-pole SUB-D connector

LED red Fault on rear of unit
LED green Run
Reversing key
ON key I Raise key
OFF key O P Lower key

Key for toggling between control levels
Jog key Jog 7 8 9
4 5 6 0 to 9: number keys
1 2 3
0 +/- Reset Reset key (acknowledge)

Sign key
Fig. 8-15 View of the OP1S
8.5.1 Connecting, run-up
8.5.1.1 Connecting
The OP1S can be connected to the units in the following ways:

♦ Connection via 3 m or 5 m cable (e.g. as a hand-held input device
for start-up)
♦ Connection via cable and adapter for installation in a cabinet door
♦ Plugging into MASTERDRIVES Compact units (for point-to-point
linking or bus configuration)
♦ Plugging into MASTERDRIVES Compact PLUS units (for bus
configuration)
Connection via The cable is plugged into the Sub D socket X103 on units of the
cable Compact PLUS type and into Sub D socket X300 on units of the
Compact and chassis type.
Fault
Run
O P
USS-Bus
Jog 7 8 9
4 5 6
US
S
1 2 3
via
0 +/- Reset
RS
48
OP1S 5
Connecting cable
5 5
9 9
4 4
8 8
3 3
7 7
2 2
6 6
1 1
OP1S side: Unit side:
9-pole SUB D socket 9-pole SUB D connector
Fig. 8-16 The OP1S directly connected to the unit
8.5.1.2 Run-up
After the power supply for the unit connected to the OP1S has been
turned on or after the OP1S has been plugged into a unit which is
operating, there is a run-up phase.
NOTICE The OP1S must not be plugged into the Sub D socket if the SCom1
interface parallel to the socket is already being used elsewhere, e.g.
bus operation with SIMATIC as the master.
NOTE In the as-delivered state or after a reset of the parameters to the factory
setting with the unit's own control panel, a point-to-point link can be
adopted with the OP1S without any further preparatory measures.
When a bus system is started up with the OP1S, the slaves must first
be configured individually. The plugs of the bus cable must be removed
for this purpose.
With the "OP: Download" function, a parameter set stored in the OP1S
can be written into the connected slave. Starting from the basic menu,
the "OP: Download" function is selected with "Lower" or "Raise" and
activated with "P".
Ê P Ì
VectorControl Download
*Menu Selection *1909199701
OP: Upread MASTERDRIVES VC
#OP: Download
Example: Selecting and activating the "Download" function
One of the parameter sets stored in the OP1S must now be selected
with "Lower" or "Raise" (displayed in the second line). The selected ID
is confirmed with "P". The slave ID can now be displayed with "Lower"
or "Raise" (see section "Slave ID"). The "Download" procedure is then
started with "P". During download, the OP1S displays the currently
written parameter.
Ê P Ì Ê P Ì
Download Download VectorControl 00
*1909199701 *1909199701 Download
MASTERDRIVES VC MASTERDRIVES VC Pxxx
Example: Confirming the ID and starting the "Download" procedure
With "Reset", the procedure can be stopped at any time. If downloading

has been fully completed, the message "Download ok" appears and the
display returns to the basic menu.
After the data set to be downloaded has been selected, if the
identification of the stored data set does not agree with the identification
of the connected unit, an error message appears for approximately 2
seconds. The operator is then asked if downloading is to be
discontinued.
Ê P Ì Ê P Ì Ê 2s Ì
Download Download Error: VectorControl 00
*1909199701 *1909199701 Different Stop download?
MASTERDRIVES VC MASTERDRIVES VC IDs #yes
no
Yes: Downloading is discontinued.

No: Downloading is carried out.
05.2006 Parameterizing steps
9 Parameterizing steps
The chapter entitled "Parameterizing Steps" describes the parameter
assignments to be made for starting up SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES:
In addition to this chapter, you should also refer to Chapter 3 (First
Start-Up) and Chapter 8 (Parameterization) in the operating
instructions.
The parameterizing steps are divided into different categories:
♦ Parameter reset to factory setting (9.1)
♦ Quick parameterization procedures (9.2)
♦ Detailed parameterization (9.4)
Parameter reset to The factory setting is the defined initial state of all the parameters of a
factory setting unit. The units are delivered with this setting.
A detailed description is given in section 9.1.
Quick The quick parameterization procedures can always be used when the
parameterization exact application conditions of the units are known and no tests with the
procedures associated extensive parameter corrections are required.
The following quick parameterization procedures are described in
section 9.2:
1. Quick parameterization, P060 = 3
(Parameterizing with parameter modules)
2. Parameterizing with user settings
(Fixed settings or factory settings, P060 = 2)
3. Parameterizing with existing parameter files
(Download, P060 = 6)
Depending on the specific conditions prevailing in each case,
parameters can either be assigned in detail (see section 9.4) or with
one of the specified quick procedures.
By activating a fixed setting (P060 = 2) the parameters of the unit can
also be reset to the original values.
Parameterizing steps 05.2006
Detailed Detailed parameterization should always be used in cases where the

parameterization exact application conditions of the units are not known beforehand and
detailed parameter adjustments need to be made locally, e.g. on initial
start-up.
The description of detailed parameterization in section 9.4 is divided
into the following main steps:
1. Power section definition (P060 = 8)
2. Board definition (P060 = 4)
3. Drive definition (P060 = 5)
4. Function adjustment.
Supply
conditions
Power sections
CUVC
Optional
boards
Motor
Motor
encoder
parameterization
Board configuration Drive setting Detailed
Function adjustment
(P060 = 4) (P060 = 5)
As-delivered state
Parameterizing with user settings (fixed setting, P060 = 2)

quick parameterization
Power section definition

Factory settings (parameter reset) (P060 = 2)
Procedures for
(P060 = 8)
Parameterizing with existing parameter files (download, P060 = 6)
Parameterizing with parameter modules(quick parameterization, P060 = 3)
Fig. 9-1 Detailed and quick parameterization
9.1 Parameter reset to factory setting

The factory setting is the defined initial state of all parameters of a unit.
The units are delivered with this setting.
You can restore this initial state at any time by resetting the parameters
to the factory setting, thus canceling all parameter changes made since
the unit was delivered.
The parameters for defining the power section and for releasing the
technology options and the operating hours counter and fault memory
are not changed by a parameter reset to factory setting.
Parameter number Parameter name
P050 Language
P070 Order No. 6SE70..
P072 Rtd Drive Amps
P073 Rtd Drive Power
P366 Select FactSet
P947 Fault memory
P949 Fault value
Table 9-1 Parameters which are not changed by the factory setting
If the parameters are reset to the factory setting via one of the
parameters (SST1, SST2, SCB, 1.CB/TB, 2.CB/TB), the interface
parameters of that interface are not changed either. Communication via
that interface therefore continues even after a parameter reset to the
factory setting.

P053 Parameterization enable
P700 SST bus address
P701 SST baud rate
P702 SST PKW number
P703 SST PZD number
P704 SST frame failure
Table 9-2 The factory setting is made either via interface SST1 or SST2:
Parameters that are not changed by the factory setting either. None of
the indices of the parameters is changed.

P696 SCB protocol
P700 SST bus address
P701 SST baud rate
P702 SST PKW number
P703 SST PZD number
P704 SST frame failure
Table 9-3 The factory setting is made via interface SCB2: Parameters that are not
changed by the factory setting either. None of the indices of the
parameters is changed.

P711 to P721 CB parameters 1 to 11
P722 CB/TB frame failure
P918 CB bus address
Table 9-4 The factory setting is made either via interface 1.CB/TB or 2.CB/TB:
Parameters that are not changed by the factory setting either. None of
the indices of the parameters is changed.
NOTE Parameter factory settings which are dependent on converter or motor

parameters are marked with '(~)' in the block diagrams.
Grant parameter access

P053 = 6
6: Parameter changes permitted via PMU and serial interface
SCom1 (OP1S and PC)
P060 = 2 Select "Fixed settings" menu
Select desired factory setting

P366 = ?
0: Standard with PMU, setpoint via MOP (BICO1)
1: Standard with OP1S, setpoints via fixed setpoints (BICO1)
2: Cabinet unit with OP1S, setpoint via fixed setpoints (BICO1)
3: Cabinet unit with PMU, setpoint via MOP (BICO1)
4: Cabinet unit with OP1S and NAMUR terminal strip (SCI),
setpoint via MOP (BICO1)
Note: This parameter was correctly set prior to delivery of
the unit and only needs to be changed in exceptional
cases.
re 0 to 3: In BICO data set 2 activation/deactivation is carried
out via the terminal strip and the setpoint is specified
via fixed setpoint (P405).
Start parameter reset
P970 = 0
0: Parameter reset
1: No parameter change
Unit carries out parameter
reset and then leaves the
"Fixed settings" menu
Fig. 9-2 Sequence for parameter reset to factory setting
Factory settings
dependent on P366
Para- Designation of the Factory Factory Cabinet unit Cabinet unit Cabinet unit
meters parameter on the setting with setting with with with PMU or with NAMUR
depen- OP1S PMU OP1S OP1S or terminal strip terminal strip
dent on terminal strip (SCI)
P366
(Src = Source) P366 = 0 P366 = 1 P366 = 2 P366 = 3 P366 = 4
BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2 BICO1 BICO2
(i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002) (i001) (i002)
P443 Src MainSetpoint KK058 KK040 KK040 KK040 KK040 KK040 KK058 KK040 KK058 K4102
P554 Src ON/OFF1 B0005 B0022 B2100 B0022 B2100 B0022 B0005 B0022 B2100 B4100
P555 Src1 OFF2 B0001 B0020 B0001 B0020 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001
P556 Src2 OFF2 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B4108
P565 Src1 Fault Reset B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107
P568 Src Jog Bit0 B0000 B0000 B2108 B0000 B2108 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000
P571 Src FWD Speed B0001 B0001 B2111 B0001 B2111 B0001 B0001 B0001 B2111 B4129
P572 Src REV Speed B0001 B0001 B2112 B0001 B2112 B0001 B0001 B0001 B2112 B4109
P573 Src MOP UP B0008 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0008 B0000 B2113 B4105
P574 Src MOP Down B0009 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0009 B0000 B2114 B4106
P575 Src No ExtFault1 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0018 B0018 B0018 B0018 B0018 B0018
P588 Src No Ext Warn1 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0001 B0020 B0020 B0020 B0020 B0020 B0020
P590 Src BICO DSet B0014 B0014 B0014 B0014 B0012 B0012 B0012 B0012 B4102 B4102
P651 Src DigOut1 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0107 B0107
P693.1 SCI AnaOutActV 1 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 KK020 KK020
P693.2 SCI AnaOutActV 2 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0022 K0022
P693.3 SCI AnaOutActV 3 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0000 K0024 K0024
P698.1 Src SCI DigOut 1 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0000 B0100 B0100
P704.3 SCom TlgOFF SCB 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 100 ms 100 ms
P796 Compare Value 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 2.0 2.0
P797 Compare Hyst 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 1.0 1.0
P049.4 OP OperDisp r229 r229 P405 P405 P405 P405 r229 r229 r229 r229
Table 9-5 Factory setting dependent on P366
All other factory setting values are not dependent on P366 and can be
taken from the parameter list or from the block diagrams (in the
Compendium).
The factory settings for Index 1 (i001) of the respective parameter are
displayed in the parameter list.
Significance of the binectors and connectors for factory setting:
Entry Description See function diagram

(in Compendium)
B0000 Fixed binector 0 -15.4-
B0001 Fixed binector 1 -15.4-
B0005 PMU ON/OFF -50.7-
B0008 PMU MOP UP -50.7-
B0009 PMU MOP DOWN -50.7-
B0010 DigIn1 -90.4-
B0012 DigIn2 -90.4-
B0014 DigIn3 -90.4-
B0016 DigIn4 -90.4-
B0018 DigIn5 -90.4-
B0020 DigIn6 -90.4-
B0022 DigIn7 -90.4-
B0100 Rdy for ON -200.5-
B0104 Operation -200.5-
B0107 No fault -200.6-
B0108 No OFF2 -200.5-
B0120 CompV OK -200.5-
B2100 SCom1 Word1 Bit0 -100.8-
...
B2115 SCom1 Word1 Bit15 -100.8-
B4100 SCI1 Sl1 DigIn -Z10.7- / -Z30.4-
...
B4115 SCI1 Sl1 DigIn -Z30.8-
r229 n/f(set,smooth) -360.4- / -361.4- / -362.4- /
-363.4- / -364.4-
P405 Fixed setpoint 5 -290.3-
KK0020 Speed (smoothed) -350.8- / -351.8- / -352.8-
K0022 Output Amps (smoothed) -285.8- / -286.8-
K0024 Torque (smoothed) -285.8-
KK0040 Current FixSetp -290.6-
KK0058 MOP (Output) -300.8-
Bxxxx = Binector = freely assignable digital signal

(values 0 and 1)
Kxxxx = Connector = freely assignable 16-bit signal
(4000h = 100 %)
KKxxxx = Double connector = freely assignable 32-bit signal
(4000 0000h = 100 %)
Use of binectors for digital inputs in factory settings:

When B0010 to B0017 (DigIn1 to 4) are used, the corresponding digital
outputs cannot be used!
P366 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
BICO data 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
set
B0010 P567 P567
B0012 P590 P590 P590 P590
B0014 P590 P590 P590 P590
B0016 P580 P580 P580 P580 P580
B0018 P567 P567 P575 P575 P575 P575 P575 P575
B0020 P555 P555 P588 P588 P588 P588 P588 P588
B0022 P554 P554 P554 P554
Meaning of the parameters in the factory setting:

Entry Description See function diagram
(in Compendium)
P554 Src ON/OFF1 -180-
P555 Src1 OFF2(electr) -180-
P567 Src3 Fault Reset -180-
P575 Src No ExtFault1 -180-
P580 Src FixSetp Bit0 -190-
P588 Src No Ext Warn 1 -190-
P590 Src BICO DSet -190-
9.2 Quick parameterization procedures

The following quick procedures are always used in cases where the
application conditions of the units are exactly known and no tests and
related extensive parameter corrections are required. Typical examples
of applications for quick parameterization are when units are installed in
standard machines or when a unit needs replacing.
9.2.1 Quick parameterization, P060 = 3

(Parameterizing with parameter modules)
Pre-defined, function-assigned parameter modules are stored in the

units. These parameter modules can be combined with each other, thus
making it possible to adjust your unit to the desired application by just a
few parameter steps. Detailed knowledge of the complete parameter
set of the unit is not required.
Parameter modules are available for the following function groups:
1. Motors (input of the rating plate data with automatic
parameterization of open-loop and closed-loop control)
2. Open-loop and closed-loop control types
3. Setpoint and command sources
Parameterization is effected by selecting a parameter module from
each function group and then starting quick parameterization. In
accordance with your selection, the necessary unit parameters are set
to produce the desired control functionality. The motor parameters and
the relevant controller settings are calculated using automatic
parameterization (P115 = 1).
NOTE Parameterizing with parameter modules is carried out only in BICO

data set 1 and in function and motor data set 1.
Quick parameterization is effected in the "Download" converter status.
Since quick parameterization includes the factory settings for all
parameters, all previous parameter settings are lost.
Quick parameterization incorporates an abridged drive setting, (e.g.
pulse encoder always with pulse number/revolution 1024). The
complete procedure is given in the "Drive setting" section.
Function diagram Function diagram modules (function diagrams) are shown after the flow
modules chart for parameter modules stored in the unit software. On the first few
pages are the :
♦ setpoint and command sources (sheets s0 to s81), on the following
pages are the
♦ analog outputs and the display parameters (sheet a0) and the
♦ open-loop and closed-loop control types (sheets r0 to r5).
It is therefore possible to put together the function diagrams to exactly
suit the selected combination of setpoint/command source and
open/closed-loop control type. This will give you an overview of the
functionality parameterized in the units and of the necessary
assignment of the terminals.
The function parameters and visualization parameters specified in the
function diagrams are automatically adopted in the user menu
(P060 = 0) and can be visualized or changed there.
The parameter numbers of the user menu are entered in P360.
Reference is made in the function diagrams to the respective function
diagram numbers (Sheet [xxx]) of the detail diagrams (in the
Compendium).
P060 = 3 Menu selection "Quick parameterization"
Input unit line voltage in V

P071 = ?
AC units: r.m.s. alternating voltage
DC units: DC link voltage
The input is important, e.g. for voltage limitation control
(Vdmax control, P515 = 1)
Enter the motor type

P095 = ?
2: Compact asynchronous motor 1PH7 (=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
P095=2 P095=10 P095=11 10: Async./Sync. IEC (international Norm)
11: Async./Sync. NEMA (US-Norm)
Enter the code number for the connected motor of the
P097 = ?
Range 1PH7(=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
(see "Motor List" section)
(Automatic parameter assignment is implemented as soon
as the settings P095 = 2 and P097 > 0 have been made)
Enter the open/closed-loop control type (sheet r0 to r5)
P100 = ?
0: v/f open-loop control + n-controller with pulse encoder
P095=2
(P130 = 11)
P097>0 1: v/f open-loop control
2: v/f open-loop control, textile
3: Vector control without tachometer (f-control)
4: Vector control with tachometer (n-speed)
with pulse encoder (P130 = 11)
5: Torque control (M control)
with pulse controller (P130 = 11)
For v/f control (0..2) a linear curve is set in P330 (P330 = 1:
parabolic).
The pulse encoder has a pulse number of P151 = 1024 per
revolution.
The following inputs of motor data are necessary if the motor
deviates from the converter data, if one of the vector control
types (P100 = 3, 4, 5) has been selected or if speed feedback is
used (P100 = 0). In the case of motor outputs higher than
approx. 200 kW one of the vector control types should be used.
Enter the rated motor voltage in V 1

P101 = ?
as per rating plate
Enter the rated motor current in A 2

P102 = ?
as per rating plate
(group drives: total of all motor currents)
IEC motor: Cos (phi) as per rating plate 3

P104=? P105=?
NEMA motor: nominal rating [Hp]
(group drives: total of all ratings)
NEMA motor: Enter the motor efficiency in %
P106=?
as per rating plate
Enter the rated motor frequency in Hz 4

P107 = ?
as per rating plate
Enter the rated motor speed in rpm 5

P108 = ?
as per rating plate
Enter the motor pole pair number

P109 = ?
(is automatically calculated)
SIEMENS 3 ~Mot. 1LA7133-4AA10 CE

IP 55 Nr.E H984 6148 01 002
4 132 M/IM B3 EN 60034 Th.Cl. F
50 Hz 230 / 400V /D 60 Hz 460 V
5 7.5 kW 26.5 / 15.3 A 8.6 kW 14.7 A
cos 0.82 1455 / min cos 0.83 1755 / min
3 220-240 / 380-420 V / 440/480 V
26.5-27.0 / 15.3-15.6 A SF 1.1 15.0-15.2 A
2
WARNING!
P114 = ?
INCORRECT SETTINGS CAN BE DANGEROUS!
P100=1,2 For vector control only:
Process-related boundary conditions for control
0: Standard drives (default)
1: Torsion, gear play
2: Acceleration drives
3: Load surge
4: Smooth running characteristics
5: Efficiency optimization
6: Heavy-duty starting
7: Dynamic torque response in field-weakening range
See "Drive setting" section for description
Thermal motor System with motor protection according to UL regulation?

protection desired? The motor temperature is calculated via the motor current.
no yes (In the pre-setting, motor overload protection in accordance with
P095=2 UL regulation is activated!)
P097>0
Specify motor cooling
P382 = ?
0: self-ventilated
1: forced-ventilated
(automatically pre-set for P095 = 2, P097 > 0)
Enter the thermal time constant of the motor in s
P383 = 0 P383 = ?
The values can be taken from the table on the next page
(automatically pre-set for P095 = 2, P097 > 0).
The motor load limit (P384.2) is pre-assigned to 100 %.
Select setpoint and command source (sheet s0...s4, s6, s7)
P368 = ?
0: PMU + MOP (Operation via the operator panel,
P368 = 0,1,2,3 4,7 5 6 see next page for description)
1: Analog and digital inputs on the terminal strip
2: Fixed setpoints and digital inputs on the terminal strip
3: MOP and digital inputs on the terminal strip
4: USS1 (e.g. with SIMATIC)
5: not used
6: PROFIBUS (CBP)
7: OP1S and fixed setpoints via SCom1 (X300: PMU)
8: OP1S and MOP via SCom1 (X300: PMU)
P700.01 = ? Enter the USS bus address
P740 = ? Enter the SIMOLINK module address
P918.01 = ? Enter the PROFIBUS address
Start of quick parameterization

P370 = 1
1: Parameter change in acordance with selected combination
of parameter modules
(automatic factory setting according to P366)
(followed by automatic parameterization as for
P115 = 1)
Return to the user menu
P060 = 0
End of quick parameterization
P368 Settings PMU and motor-operated potentiometer (P368 = 0)

setpoint source This setting allows the drive to be operated via the PMU:
ON / OFF =
/
faster / slower = Arrow up / down
Anticlockwise / = Arrow left / right

clockwise
When the key is pressed, the motor starts and runs up to the
minimum speed set in P457.
Afterwards, the speed can be increased by pressing the key.
The speed is decreased by pressing the key.
The selection of setpoint sources (P368) may be restricted by the type

of factory setting (P366).
Factory setting P366 Setpoint source P368
0 = PMU 0 ... 8 = All sources possible
1 = OP1S 7 = OP1S
2 = Cabinet unit OP1S 7 = OP1S
3 = Cabinet unit PMU 0 = PMU
4 = OP1S and SCI 8 = OP1S
P383 Mot Tmp T1 Thermal time constant of the motor
Setting notes Activation of the i2t calculation is made by setting a parameter value >=
100 seconds.
Example: for a 1LA5063 motor, 2-pole design, the value 480 seconds
has to be set.
The thermal time constants for Siemens standard motors are given in
the following table in seconds:
1LA-/1LL motors Type 2- 4- 6- 8- 10- 12-

pole pole pole pole pole pole
1LA5063 480 780 - - - -
1LA5070 480 600 720 - - -
1LA5073 480 600 720 - - -
1LA5080 480 600 720 - - -
1LA5083 600 600 720 - - -
1LA5090 300 540 720 720 - -
1LA5096 360 660 720 840 - -
1LA5106 480 720 720 960 - -
1LA5107 - 720 - 960 - -
1LA5113 840 660 780 720 - -
1LA5130 660 600 780 600 - -
1LA5131 660 600 - - - -
1LA5133 - 600 840 600 - -
1LA5134 - - 960 - - -
1LA5163 900 1140 1200 720 - -
1LA5164 900 - - - - -
1LA5166 900 1140 1200 840 - -
1LA5183 1500 1800 - - - -
1LA5186 - 1800 2400 2700 - -
1LA5206 1800 - 2700 - - -
1LA5207 1800 2100 2700 3000 - -
1LA6220 - 2400 - 3300 - -
1LA6223 2100 2400 3000 3300 - -
1LA6253 2400 2700 3000 3600 - -
1LA6280 2400 3000 3300 3900 - -
1LA6283 2400 3000 3300 3900 - -
1LA6310 2700 3300 3600 4500 - -
1LA6313 2700 3300 3600 4500 - -
1LA6316 2880 3480 3780 4680 - -
1LA6317 2880 3480 3780 4680 - -
1LA6318 - - 3780 4680 - -
1LA831. 2100 2400 2700 2700 3000 3000
1LA835. 2400 2700 3000 3000 3300 3300
1LA840. 2700 3000 3300 3300 3600 3600
1LA845. 3300 3300 3600 3600 4200 4200
1LL831. 1500 1500 1800 1800 2100 2100
1LL835. 1800 1800 2100 2100 2400 2400
1LL840. 2100 2100 2100 2100 2400 2400
1LL845. 2400 2100 2400 2400 2700 2700
Type 2- 4- 6- 8- 10- 12-

pole pole pole pole pole pole
1LA135. 1800 2100 2400 - - -
1LA140. 2100 2400 2700 2700 - -
1LA145. 2400 2700 3000 3000 3300 3300
1LA150. 3000 3000 3300 3300 3900 3900
1LA156. 3600 3300 3600 3600 4200 4200
1LL135. 1200 1200 1500 - - -
1LL140. 1500 1500 1800 1800 - -
1LL145. 1800 1800 1800 1800 2100 2100
1LL150. 2100 1800 2100 2100 2400 2400
1LL156. 2400 2100 2100 2100 2400 2400
1LA7 motors The data for 1LA5 motors are also applicable for 1LA7 motors with the
same designation.
1LG4 motors Type 2- 4- 6- 8-

pole pole pole pole
183 1200 1500 - -
186 - 1500 1800 2100
188 1200 2100 2100 2400
206 1500 - 2100 -
207 1500 2100 2400 2400
208 1800 2700 2700 3000
220 - 2700 - 2700
223 2100 2400 2700 2700
228 2100 2700 3000 3300
253 2700 2700 3000 3000
258 2400 3000 3600 3000
280 2400 2700 3000 3300
283 2400 3000 2700 3300
288 2400 3300 3000 3300
310 2400 2700 3000 2700
313 2400 2400 3300 4200
316 2100 3600 3600 3600
317 3000 3600 4200 4500
318 3300 4200 4500 4800
1LG6 motors Type 2- 4- 6- 8-

pole pole pole pole
183 1800 1800 - -
186 - 1800 2700 2100
206 1800 - 2700 -
207 1800 2700 2700 2700
220 - 2400 - 2700
223 2400 2700 3300 2400
253 2700 3000 2700 3000
280 2400 3300 3000 3600
283 2400 3000 3600 3900
310 2700 3300 3600 3900
313 2700 3900 3600 4200
316 2700 3900 4200 4200
317 2700 3900 4500 3900
318 3600 3900 4500 5700
1PH6 motors Type 1PH610 1PH613 1PH616 1PH618 1PH620 1PH622

T1 in s 1500 1800 2100 2400 2400 2400
Exceptions: 1PH610 at n = 1150 rpm: T1 = 1200 n
1PA6 motors Shaft height 100 132 160 180 225

(= 1PH7 motors)
T1 in s 1500 1800 2100 2400 2400
Type 1PH7284 1PH7286 1PH7288

T1 in s 4500 5000 5400
1PL6 motors Shaft height 180 225

T1 in s 1800 1800
Type 1PL6284 1PH6286 1PH6288

T1 in s 3200 3900 4300
1PH4 motors Shaft height 100 132 160

T1 in s 1500 1800 2100
NOTE If 1PH7, 1PL6, or 1PH4 motors are parameterized in the list selection
(P097), both the motor cooling (P382) and the thermal motor time
constant (P383) are assigned the correct default values.
Reference quantities Display of function parameters, monitoring parameters, and connectors

are limited to double the reference value.
After fast parameterization, the reference and rated motor values are
identical. This enables signal representation (e.g. via connectors) up to
twice the rated motor values. If this is not sufficient, you can switch to
the menu "Drive setting" (P060 = 5) to adapt the reference values. The
following parameters are available for that purpose:
P350 Reference current in A
P351 Reference voltage in V
P352 Reference frequency in Hz
P353 Reference speed in rpm
P354 Reference torque in Nm
Dependent Speed reference frequency and reference speed are always coupled
reference values via the number of pole pairs.
60
P353 = P352 ×
P109
If one of the two parameters is altered, the second is converted using
this equation.
The reference power (in W) is calculated from the reference torque and
reference speed:
P354 × P353 × 2 × π
R W,ref =
60
Power values of the closed-loop control are also stated as a percentage

and refer to the reference power stated. Conversion to rated motor
power is possible using the ratio PW,ref / Pmot,rated.
P113 × 2 × π × P108
Pmot,rated =
60
Automatic motor For exact determination of the motor parameters, it is possible to carry
identification out automatic motor identification and speed controller optimization.
For this purpose, the procedures of the "Drive setting" have to be
observed. If one of the vector control types (P100 = 3, 4, 5) of a
converter without a sinusoidal output filter and of an induction motor
without an encoder or with a pulse encoder (correct number of pulses in
P151) is used, the motor identification procedure can be shortened. In
this case, "Complete motor identification" has to be selected (P115 = 3)
and the converter has to be powered up accordingly if the alarms A078
and A080 appear.
WARNING During motor identification inverter pulses are released and the drive
rotates!
For reasons of safety, identification should first be carried out without
coupling of the load.
-X101
Terminal strip Sh. [90] /1 n959.81 = 4
P24
05.2006
*) If used as digital inputs, the parameters /2

P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have M24
*)
Siemens AG
to be set to 0! P651.1 (107) no fault
0=fault B B0107
If used as digital outputs, B10 to B14 must /3
not be wired. B0010
*) from sheet [200]
P652.1 (104) operation
1=operation
If P366 = 3 B B0104
/4
P590 = B0012 B0012
P651 = B0000 *)
P653.1 (0)
P652 = B0000
P653 = B0107 B P590 (14)
/5 Src BICO DSet
6SE7087-6KN60
P48 PMU Operating Display B
B0014
Seven segment display Toggle key (acknowledge)

P
Raise key
P554.1 (5)
Reversing key ON/OFF1 Src ON/OFF1
I O B0005 B
to sheet [180]
I
ON key P573.1 (8)
Raise MOP Src Raise MOP
B0008 B
Operating Instructions
Toggle key
OFF key O P
P574.1 (9)
Lower key Lower MOP Src Lower MOP
B0009 B
X300
PMU Sh.[50]
Note: Accel Time MOP Decel Time MOP

P431 P432
The keys "Raise MOP" and "Lower MOP"
are only effective if the operating display MOP (max) MOP(Outp)
(r000) is selected. P421 r424
Src Main Setp
Explanations: MOP(Outp) P443.B (58) to sheet [316.1]
MOP Sheet [300]
KK058 KK N
Sh. [300] : See Compendium Sheet 300
Src.T Setp
N : Reference to N-controller (see rXX-sheets) P422 P486.B (58) to sheet [320.1]
MOP (min.) KK M
M : Reference to T-controller (see rXX-sheets)
P425 (for T control)
: Reference to the current path sheet "a0" Conf.MOP

1
"Analog outputs and display variables" 0xx0 = ... without storing after OFF
0xx1 = ... Storing after OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source Not valid for Compact PLUS!
9-19
Parameterizing steps
- s0 -
PMU and MOP (P368=0) MASTERDRIVES VC
9-20
Terminal strip Sheet [90] -X101 n959.82 = 4
/1
P24
/2
M24
*)
P651.1 (107) no fault
0=fault B B0107
/3
B0010
*) from sheet [200]

1=operation
B B0104
/4
B0012
*)
P653.1 (0)
B
/5
B0014
*)
P654.1
B P561.1 (16)
/6 Src Inv Release
B0016 B
P567.1 (18)
*) If used as digital inputs, the parameters /7 Src3 Acknowledge
B0018 B
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have
to be set to 0! P555.1 (20)
/8 Src1 OFF2
B0020 B to sheet [180]
If used as digital outputs, B10 to B14 must
P554.1 (22)
not be wired. <1> Src ON/OFF1
B0022 B
Analog inputs Sheet [80] / sheet [82] AnaIn Conf. CUVC Compact PLUS
P632 S3 Jumper on EBV
AnaIn1 Smoothing
switch S3 switch
P634.1 AnaIn1 Offset AnaIn1 Setpoint
Analog input 1 P631.1 r637.1 0 -10 ... 10 V open 5-6
Src Main setpoint 1 -10 ... 10 V
A AnaIn1 Setpoint P443.B (11)
to sheet[316.1]
<2> K0011 KK N 2 -20 ... 20 mA
D 3 -20 ... 20 mA closed 4-5
<3>
Src.T setpoint 4 -04 ... 20 mA
0-10 ... 10 V P486.B (11) to sheet[320.1] Setting guide for gain and
corresponds to AnaIn2 Smoothing KK M offset of setpoint frequency/
-100 .... 100 % P634.2 AnaIn2 Offset AnaIn2 Setpoint (only T-control) speed values: sheet[316]
Analog input 2 P631.2 r637.2
A <1> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X101/9
AnaIn2 Setpoint
Compact PLUS type unit: Terminal X102/19
X102/17 K0013
<2> Compact/chassis type unit: Terminal X102/15
X102/18 D Compact PLUS type unit: Terminal X101/9
<3> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X102/16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source
05.2006
- s1 -
Analog input and terminal strip (P368=1) MASTERDRIVES VC
Terminal strip Sheet[90] -X101
/1
P24 n959.83 = 4
05.2006
/2
M24
*)
Siemens AG
P651.1 no fault
0=fault B B0107
/3
B0010
*)
P652.1 operation from sheet [200]
1=operation B B0104
/4
B0012
*)
P653.1
B P580.1 (14)
/5 Src.FSetp Bit 0
6SE7087-6KN60
B0014 B
*)
P654.1
B P581.1 (16)
/6 Src FSetp Bit 1
B0016 B
*) If used as digital inputs, the parameters P567.1 (18)
/7 Src3 Acknowledge to sheet [180]
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have B0018 B
to be set to 0! P555.1 (20)
/8 Src1 OFF2
B0020 B
P554.1 (22)
not be wired. <1> Src ON/OFF1
B0022 B
FSetp FSetp
Bit 3 Bit 2
<1> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X101/9 P418.B P417.B
Sheet [290] Compact PLUS type unit: Terminal X102/19
Fixed setpoints
KK0041
Fixed setpoint1 0 0 0 0
P401.F KK0042
P402.F KK0043
in %
Fixed setpoint3 0 0 1 0 Active FSetp
P403.F KK0044 r420
Fixed setpoint4 0 0 1 1 Src Main Setpoint
Act.FSetp P443.B (40) to sh. [316.1]
P404.F
KK0045 KK0040 KK N
P405.F KK0046
in Hz Fixed setpoint6 0 1 0 1
P406.F KK0047 Src T setpoint
Fixed setpoint7 0 1 1 0 P486.B (40) to sh. [320.1]
P407.F KK0048 KK M
Fixed setpoint8 0 1 1 1 (for T control)
P408.F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source
9-21
- s2 -
Fixed setpoints and terminal strip (P368=2) MASTERDRIVES VC
MOP and
9-22
Sheet [90] -X101 n959.84 = 4
terminal strip /1
P24
/2
M24
)
P651.1 (107) * no fault
0=fault B B0107
/3 from sheet [200]
B0010
)
P652.1 (104) * operation
1=operation
B B0104
/4
B0012
P653.1 *)
B P573.1 (14)
/5 Src Raise MOP
B0014 B
P654.1 *)
B P574.1 (16 )
/6 Src Lower MOP
B0016 B
P567.1 (18)
*) If used as digital inputs, the parameters /7 Src3 Acknowledge to sheet [180]
B0018 B
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B have
to be set to 0! P555.1 (20)
/8 Src1 OFF2
B0020 B
P554.1 (22)
<1> Src ON/OFF1
B0022 B
<1> Compact/Chassis type unit: Terminal X101/9

MOP MP Sheet [300]

Accel Time MOPDecel Time MOP
P431 P432
MOP (max) MOP (outp)

P421 r424
Raise MOP Src Main Setpoint
MOP (outp) P443.B (58) to sheet [316.1]
KK058 KK N
Lower MOP
Src T Setpoint
P422 P486.B (58) to sheet [320.1]
MOP (min.) KK M
(for T control )
P425
Conf MOP
0xx0 = ... without storing after OFF

0xx1 = ... storing after OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source
05.2006
- s3 -
MOP and terminal strip (P368=2) MASTERDRIVES VC
Baud rate PKW # PcD # n959.85 = 4
05.2006
P701.1 P702.1 P703.1
Sheet [110]
Siemens AG
Transmit actual values
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word 1) PZD2 (Data word 2)
P707.2 from sheet

<1> <2> n/f(act) [350.7], [351.7]
Reserved for write operations of K KK0148
-X101 / -X100 [352.7], [400.7]
parameter data P707.1(32)
Transmit Status word ZUW1 from sheett
K K0032
r552 [200]
<1> <2> SCom1Word1
Receive r709.1
6SE7087-6KN60
/10 / 35
RS485P Control word
PKW: 4 K2001
PZD: 2 SComWord2
Main setpoint
r709.2 to sheet [316.1]
Baud rate: P443.B
<1> <2>
/11 / 36 9.6 kB K2002 K (2002) N
Reserved for read
RS485N operations of Src T setpoint
parameter data For T control: P486.B to sheet [320.1]
K M
Receive setpoints
PKW • PKW PZD1 (Data word1) PZD2 (Data word 2)
Bit0 B2200
Sheet [100] up to Bit15
B2215 P554.1
Bit0 B2100 ON/OFF1 B (2100) Src ON/OFF1
P555.1
Bit1 B2101 OFF2 (electr.) B (2101) Src OFF2
P700.1 = Bus address
<1> Only applicable for Compact/Chassis type unit
•
B2102 OFF3 (QStop)

<2> Only applicable for Compact PLUS type unit
P704.1 = Tlg failure time B2103 Inv. Release
B2104 RGen Release
B2105 No RGen Stop
• • • • •
B2106 Setpoint Release

P565.1
Bit7 B2107 Acknowledge B (2107) Src 1 Acknow
P568.1
B (2108) Src Jog Bit0
•
B2108 Jog Bit0

B2109 Jog Bit1
B2110 PcD control P571.1
Alarm effective
Switch-on ihibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation
Undervoltage fault
Comp. Setp reached
Ramp-function gen. active

Set/actual deviation
pos./neg. speed setp

Energize main cont.
Reserve
PZD control
Ready
Ready for ON
Src Pos Spd
• • • • •
B2111 Positive Spd B (2111)

1 P572.1
15 0 B2112 Negative Spd B (2112) Src Neg. Spd
ZUW1
PcD1 (Data word1) B2113 Raise MOP to sheet [180]
Bit14 B2114 Raise MOP control word 1
Bit15 B2115 r550
External fault
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source
9-23
- s4 -
USS1 (P368=4) with Simatic MASTERDRIVES VC
9-24
CB Parameter 1
0 ... 65535 Sheet [120]
P711.01 Transmit actual values
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word 1) PZD2 (Data word 2)
P734.2 from sheet

n/f(act)
[350.7], [351.7]
••••••
••••••
[352.7], [400.7]
CB Parameter 10 parameter data P734.1(32)
Transmit Status word ZUW1 from sheett
0 ... 65535 K K0032
r552 [200]
P720.01
1. CB Word1
Receive r733.1
CB Control word
CB Parameter 11 K3001
configu-
0 ... 65535 1. CB Word2
ration Main setpoint
P721.01 to .05
r733.2 to sheet [316.1]
P443.B
K3002 K (3002) N
CB/TB TlgOFF Reserved for read
0 ... 6500 ms operations of Src T setpoint
P722.01 (10) parameter data For T control: P486.B to sheet [320.1]
P722.01 =0 : K M
No monitoring Receive setpoints
PKW • PKW PZD1 (Data word1) PZD2 (Data word 2)
Bit0 B3200
CB Bus Address
0 ... 200
Sheet [125] up to Bit15
B3215 P554.1
P918.01 (3) Bit0 B3100 ON/OFF1 B (3100) Src ON/OFF1
P555.1
Bit1 B3101 OFF2 (electr.) B (3101) Src OFF2
•
B3102 OFF3 (QStop)

B3103 Inv. Release
B3104 RGen Release
B3105 No RGen Stop
• • • • •
B3106 Setpoint Release

P566.1
Bit7 B3107 Acknowledge B (3107) Src 2 Acknow
P568.1
Src Jog Bit0
•
B3108 Jog Bit0 B (3108)

B3109 Jog Bit1
B3110 PcD control P571.1
Alarm effective
Switch-on ihibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation
Undervoltage fault
Comp. Setp reached


Energize main cont.
Reserve
PZD control
Ready
Ready for ON
Src Pos Spd
• • • • •

1 P572.1
15 0 B3112 Negative Spd B (3112) Src Neg. Spd
ZUW1
PcD1 (Data word1) B3113 Raise MOP to sheet [180]
Bit14 B3114 Raise MOP control word 1
Bit15 B3115 r550
External fault
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source
05.2006
- s6 -
PROFIBUS 1st CB (P368=6) MASTERDRIVES VC
Baud rate PKW # PcD # n957.88 = 4
05.2006
P701.1 P702.1 P703.1

Sheet [110]
Siemens AG
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word1) PcD2 (Data word 2)
P707.2 from sh.

n/f(act) [350.7], [351.7]
-X101 [352.7], [400.5]
parameter data P707.1
Status word 1 ZUW1 from sh.
Transmit K K0032
r552 [200]
Receive SCom1Word1
r709.1
6SE7087-6KN60
/10
RS485P Control word 1 Setpoint via process data
PKW:127 K2001
(only DriveMonitor):
PcD: 2 SCom1Word2
Main setpoint
r709.2
Baud rate: P443.B to sh. [316.1]
/11 9.6 kB K2002 K (2002) N
Reserved for read
parameter data for T control: P486.B to sh. [320.1]
K M
Receive setpoints
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word1) PcD2 (Data word 2)
Bit0 B2200
Sheet [100] OP1S keys bis Bit15
B2215 P554.1
I O Bit0 B2100 ON/OFF1 B (2100) Src ON/OFF1
Bit1 B2101 OFF2 (electr.)
B2102 OFF3 (QStop)
•
P700.1 = Bus address B2103 Inv Release

B2104 RGen Release
P704.1 = Tlg failure time B2105 No RGen Stop
• • • • •
B2106 Setp Release

P565.1
Reset Bit7 B2107 Acknowledge B (2107) Src1 Acknow.
P568.1
•
Jog Bit8 B2108 Jog Bit0 B (2108) Src Jog Bit0

B2109 Jog Bit1
B2110 PcD control
• • • • •
P571.1 Src positive spd

Bit11

Energize main cont.
Reserve
PcD control
Alarm effective
Switch-on inhibit
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Fault effective
Operation
Ready
Ready for ON
Undervoltage fault
Comp. setpoint reached
1 P572.1 Src negative spd
Bit12 B2112 Negative Spd B (2112)
15 0
ZUW1
B2113 Raise MOP to sheet [180]
PZD1 (Data word1) B2114 Lower MOP control word 1
Bit15 r550
P049 = OP operating display B2115 External fault
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9-25
- s7 -
OP1S / DriveMonitor and fixed setpoints at USS1 (P368=7) MASTERDRIVES VC
Terminal strip Sheet [90]
9-26
-X101 n959.89 = 4
/1
P24
/2
M24
*)
P651.1 (107) No fault
0=fault B B0107
/3
B0010
*) from sheet [200]

P652.1 (104) Operation
1=operation B B0104
/4
B0012
*)
P653.1 (0)
B P590 (14)
/5 Src BICO DSet
B0014 B
If used as digital inputs, the parameters
P651.B, P652.B, P653.B and P654.B must
be set to 0!

not be wired. to sheet [180]
*)
If P366 = 2
P590 = B0012
P651 = B0000
P652 = B0000
P653 = B0107
FSetp FSetp FSetp
Bit 2 FSetp
Bit 3 Bit 1 Bit 0
P418.B P417.B P581.B
P580.B
Fixed Sheet [290]
setpoints
KK0041
(for T control)
P401.F KK0042
in % P402.F KK0043
Fixed setpoint3 0 0 1 0 Active FSetp
P403.F KK0044
r420
Fixed setpoint4 0 0 1 1 Src Main Setpoint
Act.FSetp P443.B (40) to sheet[316.1]
P404.F
KK0045 KK0040 KK N
(for n/f control or v/f control)
See P049.4
P405.F KK0046
in Hz Fixed setpoint6 0 1 0 1
P406.F KK0047 Src T setpoint
Fixed setpoint7 0 1 1 0 P486.B (40) to sheet[320.1]
P407.F KK0048 KK M
Fixed setpoint8 0 1 1 1 (for T control)
P408.F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Setpoint source
05.2006
- s71 -
OP1S and fixed setpoints (P368=7) MASTERDRIVES VC
Baudrate PKW # PZD #
P701.1 P702.1 P703.1 n957.90 = 4
05.2006
Sheet [110]
PcD1 (Data word1) PcD2 (Data word2)
Siemens AG
PKW • PKW
P707.2 from sh.

n/f(act) [350.7], [351.7]
-X101 [352.7], [400.5]
parameter data P707.1
Status word 1 ZUW1 from sh.
Transmit K K0032
r552 [200]
Receive SST1Word1
r709.1
/10
Control word 1 Setpoint via process data
RS485P PKW:127 K2001
6SE7087-6KN60
(only DriveMonitor):
PZD: 2 SST1Word2 Main setpoint
r709.2
Baud rate: P443.B to sh. [316.1]
/11 9.6 kB Reserved for read K2002 K (2002) N
parameter data for T control: P486.B to sh. [320.1]
K M
Receive setpoints
PKW • PKW PcD1 (Data word 1) PcD2 (Data word 2)
Bit0 B2200
Sheet [100]
OP1S-keys bis Bit15
B2215 P554.1
I O Bit0 B2100 ON/OFF1 B (2100) Src ON/OFF1
Bit1 B2101 OFF2 (electr.)
B2102 OFF3 (QStop) to sh. [180]
B2103 Inv Release Control word 1
P700.1 = Bus address r550
B2104 RGen Release
P704.1 = Tlg failure time B2105 No RGen Stop
• • • • • •
B2106 Setp Release

P565.1
Reset Bit7
B2107 Acknowledge B (2107) Src1 Acknow.
Jog Bit8 B2108 Jog Bit0

B2109 Jog Bit1
B2110 PcD control
• • • • •
Bit11 B2111 Positive Spd P572.1

Bit12 Src negative spd
Reserve
PcD control
Alarm effective
Switch-on inhibit
Fault effective
Ready
Ready for ON
Undervoltage fault
Comp. setpoint reached

Energize main cont.
OFF3 effective
OFF2 effective
Operation
B2112 Negative Spd B (2112)
1 P573.1
15 0 Src Raise MOP
ZUW1 B2113 Raise MOP B (2113)
P574.1
PZD1 (Data word1) Src Lower MOP
B2114 Lower MOP B (2114)
Bit15 B2115 External fault
P049 = OP operating display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9-27
- s8 -
OP1S / DriveMonitor and MOP at USS1 (P368=8) MASTERDRIVES VC
Terminal strip -X101
9-28
Sheet [90] /1
P24 n959.91 = 4
/2
M24
*)
P651.1 (107) no fault
0=fault B B0107
/3
B0010
*) from sheet [200]

1=operation
B B0104
/4
B0012
*)
P653.1 (0)
B P590 (14)
/5 Src BICO DSet
B0014 B
P554.1 (5)
ON/OFF 1 Src ON/OFF1
I O B2100 B
P565
1 Acknowledge Src1 Acknowledge
P B2107 B
P572
Negative Spd Src Negative Spd to sheet [180]
B2112 B
P573.1 (8)
Raise MOP Src Raise MOP
B2113 B
P574.1 (9)
Lower MOP Src Lower MOP
B2114 B
MOP MP Sheet [300]

Accel Time MOPDecel Time MOP
P431 P432
MOP (max) MOP(Outp.)
P421 r424
Raise MOP Src Main Setpoint
MOP(Outp.) P443.B (58) to sheet [316.1]
KK058 KK N
Lower MOP
Src T Setpoint
P422 P486.B (58) to sheet [320.1]
MOP (min.) KK M
(for T control )
P425
Conf MOP
0xx0 = ... without storing after OFF

0xx1 = ... storing after OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
05.2006
- s81 -
OP1S and MOP (P368=8) MASTERDRIVES VC
<1> n959.80 = 3
05.2006
Display variables Analog outputs Sheet [81]

Switches on CUVC S4:
2s Rot Freq Actual Speed
r002 r015 AA1 AA2
Siemens AG
Actual speed AA1 Scaling -10 V ... 10 V
KK020 AA1 Offset
P643.1 1-3 4-6
P644.1
n/f (act) Switch S4
Src Analog Output
r218 0 mA ... 20 mA 2-3 5-6
2 n/f(act) P640.1 D 1 +/- 10 V
x y 3
KK148 K (148) y(v) = x / 100% * P643 -X102/19
from sheet AA1
A 2 -X102/20
[350.7]
[351.7] AA2 Scaling 0 ... 20 mA
AA2 Offset
[352.7] P643.2
P644.2
[400.5] Output Amps Switch S4
6SE7087-6KN60
2s Src Analog Output
r004
Output Amps P640.2 D 4 +/- 10 V
x y 6
K0022 K (22) y(v) = x / 100% * P643 -X102/21
AA2
4 I(Output Amps) A 5 -X102/22
K0242 0 ... 20 mA
from sheet <1> Only applicable for Compact/Chassis type unit,
[285.3] for Compact PLUS Sheet [82] is applicable
[286.3]
2s Output voltage
Output voltage Display parameters Sheet [30] Note concerning the setting of analog outputs:
Reference frequency
B = Reference variable (c.f. P350 ... P354)
K0021
P352 Smin = smallest signal value (e.g. in Hz, V, A)
3 U(set,v/f) Smax = largest signal value (e.g. in Hz, V, A)
K0204 P042.x
Amin = smallest output value in V
from sheet .01 Amax = largest output value in V
[285.3] K
.02 Display frequency
[286.3] Output power K Hz
.03 r043.1 to .3 Output values applying to output current:
Output power K 4 mA ⇒ Amin = + 6 V
K0023 20 mA ⇒ Amax = - 10 V
from sheet
[285.7] Reference speed Amax − Amin
[286.7] Torque *) P353 P643 = xB
30 ms
r007 Smax − Smin
Torque *)
K0024 P040.x
K .01 Amin x Smax − Amax x Smin
) P644 =
T(act) * .02 Display speed
K rpm Smax − Smin
K0241 .03 r041.1 to .3
K
from sheet
[285.7]
2s DC Link Volts
r006 Reference torque *)
DC Link Volts P354
K0025
6 UZk(ist) P038.x
.01 Explanations:
K0240 K
.02 Display torque *)
from sheet K % Sheet [300]: See Compendium sheet 300
r039.1 to .2
[285.3]
[286.3] Reference to the current path of
1
rXX sheets
*) Torque display only with n/f/T control
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Analog outputs and display variables
9-29
- a0-
MASTERDRIVES VC
n957.85 = 0
9-30
Setpoint channel Speed controller Speed limitation controller v/f characteristic Gating unit
Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 318 Sheet 364 Sheet 401 Sheet 405 Sheet 286
Ref. Boost End Field Weak
Frequency: P352 *)
Freq Mot.Freq.(n) Freq
Speed: P353 *)
P326.M P107.M (50) *) P293.M
max.Outp Volts
r346
P240.M
Srce AddSetp1 n/f-Reg.Tn
P433.B (0) P235.M Smooth. vd(act)
n/f-Reg.Gain1 Mot.voltage P287.M
KK P101.M *)
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110.0%) *) n/f(set) n/f(set,smooth) f(Slip)
Src main setpoint r482 r229 KK0188
P443.B FSetp Boost 6
KK P325.M
KK075
–
N r014
P453.F (-110.0%) *) Setpoint speed
n/f(max,neg.Spd)
– Volts
P462.F (10s) P464.F (10s) Imax-Ctrl Gain Imax-Ctrll.Tn mod
Accel Time Decel Time Maximum P331.M P332.M depth Asyc.
Smooth. n/f(act) current – Mot. 3~
Sheet 250 Sheet 352
Pulse # P223.M P128.M
P151.M (1024) *)
P330.M 3
n/f(act) r129
Src SelCurve *)
r218 Motor
Motor encoder encoder
X104 P130.M (11) *) Current
Lim. f(set,stator)
n/f(act) –
23 Tacho M KK199
KK148
24 Track A Imp.tach.
25 Track B
2 Output
26 Zero track 4
Ana.tach. current Explanations:
27 Control tr.
28 Tacho P15V Sh. [300] :
n/f(act,encoder)
See Compendium Sheet 300
Normalization KK091
N M : Reference to setpoint source (see sXX-sheets)
P138.M (3000)
Ana.TachScale
1 : Reference to current path sheet "a0"
"Analog outputs and display variables"
*) Parameter only adjustable in the "Drive setting" state (P60=5)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f characteristic with speed controller (P100=0)
05.2006
- r0 -
MASTERDRIVES VC
n957.86 = 0
05.2006
Setpoint channel Current limitation controller V/f characteristic Gating unit

Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 318 Sheet 400 Sheet 405 Sheet 286
Siemens AG
Boost end Field weak.
Ref,
frequency Mot.Freq.(n) frequency
frequency: P352 *)
speed: P353 *) P326.M P107.M (50) *) P293.M
6SE7087-6KN60
Src add. setp.1 max.Outp Volts.
P433.B (0) Slip comp Kp r346
KK P336.M (0)
f(Slip)
KK188 Smooth vd(act)
Mot. Volts P287.M
P101.M *)
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) * ) n/f(set) n/f(set,smooth) n/f(ist)
Src main setpoint r482 r229 r218
P443.B 6
FSetp Boost
KK
– P325.M
KK075
r014
N KK148
P453.F (-110.0%) * ) Setpoint speed
P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s) n/f(max,neg.spd) Volt.
Accel time Decel time 2 Mod.
Imax controller Kp Depth Asyc.
P331.M – Mot. 3~
Maximum P330.M
current Src Select Char.
3
Imax controller Tn
P128.M P332.M
r129
f(set,Stator)
Current KK199
lim.
–
Output Amps
4
*) Parameter only adjustable in the "Drive setting" status (P60=5)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f characteristic (P100=1)
9-31
- r1 -
MASTERDRIVES VC
n957.87 = 0
9-32
Setpoint channel Current limitation controller V/f characteristic Gating unit
Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 318 Sheet 402 Sheet 405 Sheet 286
Ref. Boost end Field weakening

frequency: P352 *) frequency Mot.Freq.(n) frequency
speed: P353 *) P326.M P107.M (50) *) P293.M
max.outp. volts
Src Add Setp2 r346
Src AddSetp.1
P438.B (0)
P433.B (0)
KK
KK
Smooth Vd(act)
Mot.voltage P287.M
P101.M *)
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) * ) n/f(set) n/f(set,smooth) n/f(act)
Src main setpoint r482 r229 r218
P443.B 6
FSetp boost
KK
P325.M *)
KK075
r014
KK148
N P453.F (-110,0%) * ) Setpoint speed
P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s) n/f(max,neg.spd) Volt.
Accel Time Decel Time Mod.
Imax controller Kp 2 Depth Asyc.
P331.M – Mot. 3~
Maximum P330.M
currents Src Select Char.
3
Imax controller Tn f(set,stator)
P128.M P332.M KK199
r129
Current
lim.
–
Output Amps
4
*) Parameter can only be adjusted in the "Drive setting" status (P60=5)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V/f characteristic (P100=2)
05.2006
- r2 -
Textile MASTERDRIVES VC
n957.88 = 0
05.2006
Setpoint channel Speed controller Torque/current limit Current controller Gating unit
Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 319 Sheet 362 Sheet 367 Sheet 372 Sheet 390 Sheet 285
Siemens AG
Ref. Maximum current Pw,max(gen)
frequency: P352 *) Src TorqLimit1 FSetp P128.M P259.M
speed: P353 *) P492.F (100%)
torque: P354 *)
Src TorqLimit1 r129
P354 is referred to P493.B (170)
P113 *)
K170 K
Src TorqLimit2 FSetp
P498.F (-100%) Src TorqLimit2 Torque limitation
P499.B (171)
K171 K
Start-up time Scal.T(pre)
6SE7087-6KN60
P116.M P471.M (0) TorqLimit1,act
Sheet 318 K0172
TorqLImit2,act
Isq(set)
Src Add. Setp1 K0173
K0168
P433.B (0) Smooth Vd(act)
T(set,limitr)
P235.M P240.M Kp Tn P287.M
KK r269
n/f-Reg.Kp1 n/f-Reg.Tn P283.M P284.M
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) * ) n/f(set) n/f(set,smooth) K0165
Src main setpoint r482 r229 i-Anteil
P443.B K0155 6
x 3
KK
Msoll,reg y
– –
N KK075 K0153
r014
P453.F (-110,0%) * ) Setpoint speed K0184
Sheet 381 max.mod. depth r346 Volt.
P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s) n/f(max,neg.spd) Kp Tn
Isq(act) P283.M P284.M Mod.
Accel Time Decel Time Depth Asyc.
Smooth.n/f(act) Mot. 3~
Sheet 351 ModDepth Headrm
P223.M P344.M
n/f(ist)
Field weak. charac. P339.M *)
r218 – ModSystem
Note: Sheet 382 Release
Isd (act)
n/f(ist) T(droop) P278.M
The current injection of
T(dynam.) P279.M
P278 T(droop) (Fig. 382) KK148
is only calculated for
Smoothing I(set) P280.M
frequencies below approx. 10%
of the rated motor frequency. Sheet 396 f(set,stator)
KK199
+
+
Current Slip frequency EMF
model KK188 model
*) Parameter can only be – i-comp.
2
changed in the "Drive setting"
status (P60=5)
P127.M (80%) P315.M P316.M
R(rotor)Ktmp EMF Reg.Kp EMF-Reg.Tn
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Closed-loop speed control without encoder (frequency control) P100=3
9-33
- r3 -
Master drive (P587 = 0) MASTERDRIVES VC
n957.89 = 0
9-34
Sheet 320 Sheet 363 Sheet 372 Sheet 390 Sheet 285
Maximum
current Pw,max(gen)
P128.M P259.M
Ref. TorqLimit1 FSetp
frequency: P352 *) P492.F (100%) TorqLimit1
speed: P353 *)
torque: P354 *) r496
P354 is referred to
P113 *) Torque limitation
-1
r502
Mgrenz2 FSW Mgrenz2 TorqLimit1,act
P498.F (-100%) K0172
TorqLimit2, act
K0173
Isq(set)
K0168
Smooht. Vd(act)
M(set,limitr)
P235.M P240.M Kp Tn P287.M
n/f(max,pos spd) r269
T-add. FSetp P452.F (110 %) *) n/f-Reg.Kp1 n/f-Reg.Tn P283.M P284.M
P505.F (0.0) n/f(soll) n/f(setl,smooth) K0165
Src Torq Setp r482 r229 i-comp.
P486.B K0155 3 6
x
K
Tset,reg y
KK075 – K0153 –
M r014
setpoint speed K0184
Sheet 381 max.Ausg.spg. r346 Volt.
P453.F (-110,0%) * ) Kp Tn
Isq(act) P283.M P284.M Mod.
n/f(max,neg.spd) Depth Asyc.
Smooth.n/f(act) Mot. 3~
Sheet 351 ModDepth Headrm
Start-up time
P223.M P344.M
P116.M (~)
n/f(act)
Field weak. charac. P339.M *)
r218 – ModSystem
Sheet 382 Release
Isd (act)
T(droop) P278.M
n/f(act) T(dynam.) P279.M
KK148
SmoothingI (set) P280.M
Sheet 396 f(set,Stator)
KK199
+
+
Current Slip frequency EMF
model KK188 Model
2 –
*) Parameter can only be
changed in the "Drive setting"
status (P60=5) P127.M (80%) P315.M P316.M
R(rotor)Ktmp EMF Reg Gain EMF Reg.Tn
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Closed-loop speed control without encoder (frequency control) P100=3
05.2006
- r31 -
Slave drive (P587 = 1) MASTERDRIVES VC
n957.90 = 0
05.2006
Sheet 316 Sheet 317 Sheet 319 Sheet 360 Sheet 365 Sheet 370 Sheet 390 Sheet 285
Siemens AG
Maximum current Pw,max(gen)
Ref.
frequency: P352 *) TorqLimit1 FSetp P128.M P259.M
speed: P353 *) P492.F (100%)
torque: P354 *)
Src TorqLimit1 r129
P354 is referred to P493.B (170)
P113 *)
K170 K
TorqLimit2 FSetp
P498.F (-100%) Src TorqLimit2 Torque limitation
P499.B (171)
K171 K
Start-up time Scal.Torq(pre.)
6SE7087-6KN60
P116.M P471.M TorqLimit1,act
Sheet 318 K0172
TorqLimit2,act
K0173 Isq(set)
Src Add Setp.1 Src Add Setp2
K0168
P433.B (0) P438.B (0) Smooth Vd(act)
T(set,limitr) P287.M
KK KK P235.M P240.M r269 Kp Tn
n/f-Reg.Kp1 n/f-Reg.Tn P283.M P284.M
n/f(max,pos.spd)
P452.F (110,0%) *) n/f(set) n/f(set,smooth) K0165
Src main setpoint r482 r229 i-Anteil
P443.B K0155 3 6
x
KK
Msoll,reg y –
–
KK075 K0153
N r014
P453.F (-110,0%) *) Setpoint speed K0184
n/f(max,neg.spd) Volt.
P462.F (10 s) P464.F (10 s) Sheet 380 Kp Tn
max.outp.volt. Mod.
Accel Time Decel Time Isq(act) P283.M P284.M Depth Asyc.
r346
Smooth n/f(act) Mot. 3~
Sheet250 Sheet 350
Pulse # P223.M
P151.M (1024) *) ModDepth Headrm
n/f(act) P344.M
P339.M *) Motor
r218
Motor encoder Smooth.n/f(pre) ModSystem encoder
P216.M
– Release
X104 P130.M (11) *)
Field weakening
n/f(ist) characteristic Isd (act)
23 Tacho M
KK148
24 Track A Imp.tach. Blatt 395 f(set,Stator)
25 Track B KK199
26 Zero track +
27 Control track Ana.tach. +
28 Tacho P15V 2 Slip frequency
n/f(act,encoder) Current EMF
KK188
model Model
Normalization KK091 –
P138.M (3000) P127.M (80%) P315.M P316.M

Ana.TachoComp R(rotor)Ktmp EMF Reg Gain EMF Reg.Tn
*) Parameter can only be changed in the "Drive setting" status P60=5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Closed-loop speed control (P100=4)
9-35
- r4 -
Master drive (P587 = 0) MASTERDRIVES VC
n957.91 = 0
9-36
Speed limitation
Setpoint channel controller Torque/current limit Current controller Gating unit
Sheet 320 Sheet 361 Sheet 371 Sheet 390 Sheet285
Maximum current Pw,max(gen)
TorqLimit1 FSetp P128.M P259.M
Ref.
frequency: P352 *) P492.F (100%) TorqLimit1
speed: P353 *)
torque: P354 *) r496
P354 is referred to P113 *)

Torque limitation
-1
r502
TorqLimit1,act
P498.F (-100%) TorqLimit2
TorqLimit2 FSetp K0172
TorqLimit2,act
K0173
Isq(set)
K0168
Smooth. Vd(act)
M(set,limitr) P287.M
n/f(max,pos spd) P235.M P240.M r269 Kp Tn
Torq Add. FSetp P452.F (110 %) *) n/f-Reg.Kp1 n/f-Reg.Tn P283.M P284.M
P505.F (0.0) n/f(set) n/f(set, smooth) K0165
Src Torque Setp r482 r229 i-comp.
P486.B K0155 3 6
x
K
Tset,reg y –
–
KK075 K0153
M r014
Setpoint speed K0184
Volt.
P453.F (-110,0%) Sheet 380 Kp Tn
max.outp. volts Mod.
n/f(max,neg.spd) *) Isq(act) P283.M P284.M Depth Asyc.
r346
Smooth n/f(act) Mot. 3~
Sheet 250 Sheet 350
Pulse P223.M
P151.M (1024) *) ModDepth Headrm
n/f(act) P344.M P339.M *) Motor
r218
Motor encoder Smooth.n/f(FWD) Pulse system encoder
P216.M
– release
X104 P130.M (11) *)
Field weakening
n/f(act) characteristic Isd (act)
23 Tacho M
KK148
24 Track A IPulse tach. Sheet 395 f(set, stator)
25 Track B
KK199
26 Zero track +
27 Control track Ana.tach. +
2
28 Tacho P15V Slip frequency
n/f(act,encoder) Current EMF
KK188
model model
Normalization KK091 –
P138.M (3000) P127.M (80%) P315.M P316.M

Ana.TachoComp R(rotor)Ktmp EMF Reg Gain EMF-Reg Tn
*) Parameter can only be changed in the "Drive setting" status (P60=5)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Closed-loop speed control / torque control (P100=4/5)
05.2006
- r5 -
Slave drive (P587 = 1) MASTERDRIVES VC
Parameter assignments depending on setpoint source (P368) and control type (P100):
P368 = Setpoint source
P368 = 0 P368 = 1 P368 = 2 P368 = 3 P368 = 4 P368 = 6 P368 = 7 P368 = 8

PMU + Analog FSetp + MOP + USS PROFI- OP1S + OP1S +
MOP inp. + terminals terminals BUS FSetp MOP
Parameter description terminals
P554.1 Src ON/OFF1 B0005 B0022 B0022 B0022 B2100 B3100 B2100 B2100
P555.1 Src OFF2 1 B0020 B0020 B0020 B2101 B3101 1 1
P561.1 Src InvRelease 1 B0016 1 1 1 1 1 1
P565.1 Src1 Fault Reset B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107 B2107
P567.1 Src3 Fault Reset 0 B0018 B0018 B0018 0 0 0 0
P568.1 Src Jog Bit0 0 0 0 0 B2108 B3108 B2108 0
P571.1 Src FWD Speed 1 1 1 1 B2111 B3111 B2111 1
P572.1 Src REV Speed 1 1 1 1 B2112 B3112 B2112 B2112
P573.1 Src MOP Up B0008 0 0 B0014 0 0 0 B2113
P574.1 Src MOP Down B0009 0 0 B0016 0 0 0 B2114
P580.1 Src FixSetp Bit0 0 0 B0014 0 0 0 0 0
P581.1 Src FixSetp Bit1 0 0 B0016 0 0 0 0 0
P590 Src BICO DSet B0014 * 0 0 0 0 B0014 B0014 * B0014 **
P651.1 Src DigOut1 B0107 * B0107 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0107 B0107 * B0107 *
P652.1 Src DigOut2 B0104 * B0104 B0104 B0104 B0104 B0104 B0104 * B0104 *
P653.1 Src DigOut3 0* B0115 0 0 0 0 0* 0*
P654.1 Src DigOut4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Setpoint conn. parameter KK0058 K0011 KK0040 KK0058 K2002 K3002 KK0040 KK0058
* For factory setting P366 = 2, 3

♦ P590 = B0012
♦ P651 = B0000
♦ P652 = B0000
♦ P653 = B0107
** For factory setting P366 = 4:

♦ P590 = B4102
Bxxxx = Binector (Digital signal; values 0 and 1)

Kxxxx = Connector (16-bit signal; 4000h = 100 %)
KKxxxx = Double connector (32-bit signal; 4000 0000h = 100 %)
v/f characteristic + n/f-control: Setpoint connector parameter

(Setp-KP) = P443
T-control + n/f control: Setpoint connector parameter
(Setp-KP) = P486
P100 = control type

Parameter description P100 = 0 P100 = 1 P100 = 2 f-Reg. n-Reg. P100 = 5
V/f + n V/f Textile (P587 = 0) (P587 = 0) T-Reg.
P038.1 DispTorqConn.r39.1 - - - - - Sw-KP
P038.1 DispTorqConn.r39.2 - - - - - K0165
P040.1 DispSpdConn.r41.1 Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP KK0150
P040.2 DispSpdConn.r41.2 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148
P040.3 Disp Freq Conn.r41.3 - - - KK0091 KK0091 KK0091
P042.1 Disp Freq Conn.r43.1 Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP Setp CP KK0150
P042.2 Disp Freq Conn.r43.2 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148 KK0148
P042.3 Disp Freq Conn.r43.3 KK0199 KK0199 KK0199 KK0091 KK0091 KK0091
9.2.2 Parameterizing with user settings
During parameterization by selecting user-specific fixed settings, the

parameters of the unit are described with values which are permanently
stored in the software. In this manner, it is possible to carry out the
complete parameterization of the units in one step just by setting a few
parameters.
The user-specific fixed settings are not contained in the standard
firmware; they have to be compiled specifically for the customer.
NOTE If you are interested in the provision and implementation of fixed

settings tailored to your own requirements, please get in contact with
your nearest SIEMENS branch office.
P060 = 2 Select "Fixed settings" menu
Select desired factory setting

P366 = ?
0...4: Factory settings
5: User setting 1 (currently as P366 = 0)
6: User setting 2 (currently as P366 = 0)
:
10: Lift and lifting equipment
Start parameter reset
P970 = 0
0: Parameter reset
Unit carries out parameter
reset and then leaves the
"Fixed settings" menu
Fig. 9-3 Sequence for parameterizing with user settings
9.2.3 Parameterizing by loading parameter files (download P060 = 6)

Download When parameterizing with download, the parameter values stored in a
master unit are transferred to the unit to be parameterized via a serial
interface. The following can serve as master units:
1. OP1S operator control panel
2. PCs with DriveMonitor service program
3. Automation units (e.g. SIMATIC)
The interface SCom1 or SCom2 with USS protocol of the basic unit and
field bus interfaces used for parameter transfer (e.g. CBP for
PROFIBUS DP) can serve as serial interfaces.
Using download, all changeable parameters can be set to new values.
Operating mode Type of construction Terminal SIEMENS

Fault
Run
Individual operation Compact, chassis X300

US
I
S
O P
USS-Bus (SCom1) via
RS
Jog 7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
Bus operation Compact, chassis X101 48
0 +/- Reset
5
OP1S
X300
Operating mode Type of construction Terminal USS via RS232
Individual operation Compact, chassis X300
(SCom1)
Laptop
ic
cif
pe
s-s
Operating mode Type of construction Terminal bu
Bus operation Optional board CBx e. g. X448
e. g. CBP for Profibus for CBP
Automation unit
(e. g. SIMATIC S7)
Fig. 9-4 Parameter transfer from various sources by download
Downloading with The OP1S operator control panel is capable of upreading parameter
the OP1S sets from the units and storing them. These parameter sets can then be
transferred to other units by download. Downloading with the OP1S is
thus the preferred method of parameterizing replacement units in a
service case.
During downloading with the OP1S, it is assumed that the units are in
the as-delivered state. The parameters for power section definition are
thus not transferred. (Refer to Section "Detailed parameterization,
power section definition")

P060 Menu selection
P070 Order No. 6SE70..
P072 Rtd Drive Amps(n)
P073 Rtd Drive Power(n)
Table 9-6 Parameters you cannot overwrite during download
The OP1S operator control panel also stores and transfers parameters
for configuring the USS interface (P700 to P704). Depending on the
parameterization of the unit from which the parameter set was originally
upread, communication between the OP1S and the unit can be
interrupted on account of changed interface parameters after
downloading has been completed. To enable communication to re-
commence, briefly interrupt the connection between the OP1S and the
unit (disconnect OP1S or the cable). The OP1S is then newly initialized
and adjusts itself after a short time to the changed parameterization via
the stored search algorithm.
Download with With the aid of the DriveMonitor PC program, parameter sets can be
DriveMonitor upload from the units, saved to the hard disk or to floppy disks, and
edited offline. These parameter sets, stored in parameter files, can then
be downloaded to the units again.
The offline parameter editing facility can be used to produce special
parameter files to suit a particular application. In such cases, the files
need not contain the full set of parameters but can be limited to the
parameters relevant to the application in question. For further
information, see under "Upload / Download" in the "Parameterization"
section.
NOTICE Successful parameterization of the units by download is only ensured if

the unit is in the "Download" status when the data is being transferred.
Transition into this status is achieved by selecting the "Download"
menu in P060.
P060 is automatically set to 6 after the download function has been
activated in the OP1S or in the DriveMonitor service program.
If the CU of a converter is replaced, the power section definition has to
be carried out before parameter files are downloaded.
If only parts of the entire parameter list are transferred by download, the
parameters of the following table must always be transferred too, as
these automatically result during the drive setting from the input of other
parameters. During download, however, this automatic adjustment is
not carried out.

P109 Pole pair number
P352 Reference frequency = P353 x P109 / 60
P353 Reference frequency = P352 x 60 / P109
Table 9-7 Parameters which always have to be loaded during download
If parameter P115 = 1 is set during download, the automatic

parameterization is then carried out (according to the setting of
parameter P114). In automatic parameterization, the controller settings
are calculated from the motor rating plate data and the reference values
P350 to P354 are set to the motor rated values of the first motor data
set.
If the following parameters are changed during download, they are not
then re-calculated by the automatic parameterization:
P116, P128, P215, P216, P217, P223, P235, P236, P237, P240, P258,
P259, P278, P279, P287, P291, P295, P303, P313, P337, P339, P344,
P350, P351, P352, P353, P354, P388, P396, P471, P525, P536, P602,
P603.
9.2.4 Parameterization by running script files

Description Script files are used to parameterize devices of the MASTERDRIVES
series as an alternative to downloading a parameter set. A script file is
a pure text file that must have the filename extension *.ssc. The script
file executes individual commands using a simple command syntax for
the purpose of device parameterization. (You can write the script files
using a simple text editor, such as WordPad.)
NOTE Please refer to the online help for the scriptfiles.
9.3 Motor list

Asynchronous
motors 1PH7(=PA6) /
1PL6 / 1PH4
Input in Motor order Rated Frequency Current Voltage Torque cos ϕ iµ

P097 number speed fn [Hz] In [A] Un [V] Mn [Nm] [%]
(MPRD) nn [rpm]
1 1PH7101-2_F_ 1750 60.0 9.7 398 23.5 0.748 58.3

2 1PH7103-2_D_ 1150 40.6 9.7 391 35.7 0.809 51.8
3 1PH7103-2_F_ 1750 60.95 12.8 398 34 0.835 41.3
4 1PH7103-2_G_ 2300 78.8 16.3 388 31 0.791 50.4
5 1PH7105-2_F_ 1750 60.0 17.2 398 43.7 0.773 54.1
6 1PH7107-2_D_ 1150 40.3 17.1 360 59.8 0.807 51.4
7 1PH7107-2_F 1750 60.3 21.7 381 54.6 0.802 48.8
8 1PH7131-2_F_ 1750 59.65 23.7 398 71 0.883 34.2
9 1PH7133-2_D_ 1150 39.7 27.5 381 112 0.853 46.2
10 1PH7133-2_F_ 1750 59.65 33.1 398 95.5 0.854 41.1
11 1PH7133-2_G_ 2300 78.0 42.4 398 93 0.858 40.4
12 1PH7135-2_F_ 1750 59.45 40.1 398 117 0.862 40.3
13 1PH7137-2_D_ 1150 39.6 40.6 367 162 0.855 45.8
14 1PH7137-2_F_ 1750 59.5 53.1 357 136 0.848 43.0
15 1PH7137-2_G_ 2300 77.8 54.1 398 120 0.866 39.3
16 1PH7163-2_B_ 400 14.3 28.2 274 227 0.877 40.4
17 1PH7163-2_D_ 1150 39.15 52.2 364 208 0.841 48.7
18 1PH7163-2_F_ 1750 59.2 69.0 364 185 0.855 41.2
19 1PH7163-2_G_ 2300 77.3 78.5 398 158 0.781 55.3
20 1PH7167-2_B_ 400 14.3 35.6 294 310 0.881 39.0
21 1PH7167-2_D_ 1150 39.1 66.4 357 257 0.831 50.9
22 1PH7167-2_F_ 1750 59.15 75.2 398 224 0.860 40.3
23 1PH7184-2_B_ 400 14.2 49.5 271 390 0.840 52.5
24 1PH7184-2_D_ 1150 39.1 87.5 383 366 0.820 48.0
25 1PH7184-2_F_ 1750 59.0 120.0 388 327 0.780 52.9
26 1PH7184-2_L_ 2900 97.4 158.0 395 267 0.800 48.7
27 1PH7186-2_B_ 400 14.0 67.0 268 505 0.810 58.3
28 1PH7186-2_D_ 1150 39.0 116.0 390 482 0.800 50.4
29 1PH7186-2_F_ 1750 59.0 169.0 385 465 0.800 50.0
30 1PH7186-2_L_ 2900 97.3 206.0 385 333 0.780 52.0
31 1PH7224-2_B_ 400 14.0 88.0 268 725 0.870 41.5
32 1PH7224-2_D_ 1150 38.9 160.0 385 670 0.810 49.4
33 1PH7224-2_U_ 1750 58.9 203.0 395 600 0.840 43.4

(MPRD) nn [rpm]
34 1PH7224-2_L_ 2900 97.3 274.0 395 490 0.840 42.0

35 1PH7226-2_B_ 400 14.0 114.0 264 935 0.860 43.4
36 1PH7226-2_D_ 1150 38.9 197.0 390 870 0.840 44.4
37 1PH7226-2_F_ 1750 58.9 254.0 395 737 0.820 47.4
38 1PH7226-2_L_ 2900 97.2 348.0 390 610 0.830 44.4
39 1PH7228-2_B_ 400 13.9 136.0 272 1145 0.850 45.2
40 1PH7228-2_D_ 1150 38.9 238.0 390 1070 0.850 41.4
41 1PH7228-2_F_ 1750 58.8 342.0 395 975 0.810 49.6
42 1PH7228-2_L_ 2900 97.2 402.0 395 708 0.820 46.4
43 1PL6184-4_B_ 400 14.4 69.0 300 585 0.860 47.8
44 1PL6184-4_D_ 1150 39.4 121.0 400 540 0.860 46.3
45 1PL6184-4_F_ 1750 59.3 166.0 400 486 0.840 41.0
46 1PL6184-4_L_ 2900 97.6 209.0 400 372 0.850 37.8
47 1PL6186-4_B_ 400 14.3 90.0 290 752 0.850 52.2
48 1PL6186-4_D_ 1150 39.4 158.0 400 706 0.860 39.3
49 1PL6186-4_F_ 1750 59.3 231.0 400 682 0.840 39.8
50 1PL6186-4_L_ 2900 97.5 280.0 390 494 0.840 38.7
51 1PL6224-4_B_ 400 14.2 117.0 300 1074 0.870 38.5
52 1PL6224-4_D_ 1150 39.1 218.0 400 997 0.850 39.5
53 1PL6224-4_F_ 1750 59.2 292.0 400 900 0.870 30.8
54 1PL6224-4_L_ 2900 97.5 365.0 400 675 0.870 32.3
55 1PL6226-4_B_ 400 14.0 145.0 305 1361 0.850 46.2
56 1PL6226-4_D_ 1150 39.2 275.0 400 1287 0.870 33.5
57 1PL6226-4_F_ 1750 59.1 355.0 400 1091 0.870 34.4
58 1PL6226-4_L_ 2900 97.4 470.0 395 889 0.870 32.4
59 1PL6228-4_B_ 400 14.0 181.0 305 1719 0.860 42.5
60 1PL6228-4_D_ 1150 39.2 334.0 400 1578 0.880 30.5
61 1PL6228-4_F_ 1750 59.0 470.0 400 1448 0.860 36.8
62 1PL6228-4_L_ 2900 97.3 530.0 400 988 0.870 35.0
63 1PH4103-4_F_ 1750 61.2 20.5 400 48 0.75 56.1
64 1PH4105-4_F_ 1750 61.3 28.0 400 70 0.78 48.2
65 1PH4107-4_F_ 1750 61.0 36.0 400 89 0.78 50.0
66 1PH4133-4_F_ 1750 60.2 36.0 400 96 0.82 33.3
67 1PH4135-4_F_ 1750 59.8 52.0 400 139 0.79 42.3
68 1PH4137-4_F_ 1750 59.9 63.0 400 172 0.81 36.5
69 1PH4163-4_F_ 1750 59.3 88.0 400 235 0.78 47.7
70 1PH4167-4_F_ 1750 59.4 107.0 400 295 0.80 41.1

(MPRD) nn [rpm]
71 1PH4168-4_F_ 1750 59.4 117.0 400 333 0.82 36.8

72 1PH7107-2_G_ 2300 78.6 24.8 398 50 0.80 48.8
73 1PH7167-2_G_ 2300 77.4 85.0 398 183 0.84 47.1
74 1PH7284-_ _B_ 500 17.0 144.0 400 1529 0.87 41.7
75 1PH7284-_ _D_ 1150 38.6 314.0 400 1414 0.82 50.3
76 1PH7284-_ _F_ 1750 58.7 393.0 400 1228 0.86 41.5
77 1PH7286-_ _B_ 500 17.0 180.0 400 1909 0.86 43.3
78 1PH7286-_ _D_ 1150 38.6 414.0 380 1745 0.81 52.7
79 1PH7286-_ _F_ 1750 58.7 466.0 400 1474 0.87 39.5
80 1PH7288-_ _B_ 500 17.0 233.0 400 2481 0.87 42.6
81 1PH7288-_ _D_ 1150 38.6 497.0 385 2160 0.82 50.7
82 1PH7288-_ _F_ 1750 58.7 586.0 400 1856 0.87 39.9
83 to 99 for future applications
100 1PL6284-_ _D_ 1150 38.9 478.0 400 2325 0.89 32.6
101 1PL6284-_ _F_ 1750 59.0 616.0 400 2019 0.90 26.3
102 1PL6286-_ _D_ 1150 38.9 637.0 380 2944 0.89 33.6
103 1PL6286-_ _F_ 1750 59.0 736.0 400 2429 0.91 24.7
104 1PL6288-_ _D_ 1150 38.9 765.0 385 3607 0.89 32.4
105 1PL6288-_ _F_ 1750 59.0 924.0 400 3055 0.91 25.1
106 to
for future applications
127
Table 8 Motor list 1PH7 (=1PA6) / 1PL6 / 1PH4
9.4 Detailed parameterization

Detailed parameterization should always be used in cases where the
application conditions of the units are not exactly known beforehand
and detailed parameter adjustments need to be carried out locally. An
example of a typical application is initial start-up.
9.4.1 Power section definition
The power section definition has already been completed in the as-
delivered state. It therefore only needs to be carried out if the CUVC
needs replacing, and is not required under normal circumstances.
During the power section definition, the control electronics is informed
which power section it is working with. This step is necessary for all
Compact, chassis and cabinet type units.
WARNING If CUVC boards are changed over between different units without the
power section being re-defined, the unit can be destroyed when it is
connected up to the voltage supply and energized.
The unit has to be switched to the "Power section definition" state for
carrying out the power section definition. This is done by selecting the
"Power section definition" menu. The power section is then defined in
this menu by inputting a code number.
P060 = 8 Select "Power section definition" menu
Input the code number for the unit concerned

P070 = ?
The code number is allocated to the order numbers (MLFB).
The order number can be read off the unit's rating plate.
The list of units is on the following pages.
P060 = 1 Return to parameter menu
Fig. 9-5 Sequence for performing the power section definition
NOTICE To check the input data, the values for the converter supply voltage in
P071 and the converter current in P072 should be checked after
returning to the parameter menu. They must tally with the data given on
the unit rating plate.
PWE: Parameter value P070

In [A]: Rated output current in Ampere (P072)
DC 270 V to 310 V Order number In [A] PWE

6SE7031-0RE60 100.0 20
6SE7031-3RE60 131.0 34
6SE7031-6RE60 162.0 86
6SE7032-0RE60 202.0 92
DC 510 V to 650 V Order number In [A] PWE PWE

Air-cooled Water-cooled
6SE7031-0TE60 92.0 75 -
6SE7031-2TF60 124.0 83 -
6SE7031-5TF60 146.0 91 -
6SE7031-8TF60 186.0 99 -
6SE7032-1TG60 210.0 103 -
6SE7032-6TG60 260.0 109 -
6SE7033-2TG60 315.0 113 -
6SE7033-7TG60 370.0 117 -
6SE7035-1TJ60 510.0 120 206
6SE7036-0TJ60 590.0 123 209
6SE7037-0TK60 690.0 126 212
6SE7038-6TK60 860.0 127 213
6SE7041-1TM60 1100.0 134 -
6SE7041-1TK60 1100.0 135 221
6SE7041-3TM60 1300.0 140 226
6SE7041-6TM60 1630.0 150 236
6SE7042-1TQ60 2090.0 153 239
6SE7041-3TL60 1300.0 154 199
6SE7037-0TJ60 690.0 163 167
6SE7038-6TS60 6450.0 181 247
6SE7041-1TS60 6270.0 185 250
6SE7042-5TN60 2470.0 194 244

6SE7026-1UE60 61.0 61 -
6SE7026-6UE60 66.0 63 -
6SE7028-0UF60 79.0 69 -
6SE7031-1UF60 108.0 79 -
6SE7031-3UG60 128.0 85 -
6SE7031-6UG60 156.0 95 -
6SE7032-0UG60 192.0 101 -
6SE7032-3UG60 225.0 105 -
6SE7033-0UJ60 297.0 110 200
6SE7033-5UJ60 354.0 114 202
6SE7034-5UJ60 452.0 118 204
6SE7035-7UK60 570.0 121 207
6SE7036-5UK60 650.0 124 210
6SE7038-6UK60 860.0 128 214
6SE7041-0UM60 990.0 130 216
6SE7041-1UM60 1080.0 132 218
6SE7041-2UM60 1230.0 138 224
6SE7041-4UM60 1400.0 144 230
6SE7041-4UQ60
6SE7041-6UM60 1580.0 148 234
6SE7041-6UQ60
6SE7041-1UL60 1080.0 155 195
6SE7042-4UR60 2450.0 157
6SE7041-2UL60 1230.0 159 197
6SE7043-3UR60 3270.0 161 -
6SE7044-1UR60 4090.0 165 -
6SE7044-8UR60 4900.0 169 -
6SE7045-7UR60 5720.0 173 -
6SE7046-5UR60 6540.0 177 -
6SE7036-5US60 4940.0 179 245
6SE7038-6US60 6540.0 182 248
6SE7041-1US60 6160.0 186 251
6SE7041-2US60 5840.0 188 253
6SE7042-1UN60 2050.0 190 240
6SE7042-3UN60 2340.0 192 242

6SE7026-0WF60 60.0 59 -
6SE7028-2WF60 82.0 73 -
6SE7031-0WG60 97.0 77 -
6SE7031-2WG60 118.0 81 -
6SE7031-5WG60 145.0 89 -
6SE7031-7WG60 171.0 97 -
6SE7032-1WG60 208.0 107 -
6SE7033-0WJ60 297.0 111 201
6SE7033-5WJ60 354.0 115 203
6SE7034-5WJ60 452.0 119 205
6SE7035-7WK60 570.0 122 208
6SE7036-5WK60 650.0 125 211
6SE7038-6WK60 860.0 129 215
6SE7041-0WM60 990.0 131 217
6SE7041-1WM60 1080.0 133 219
6SE7041-2WM60 1230.0 139 225
6SE7041-4WM60 1400.0 145 231
6SE7041-4WQ60
6SE7041-6WM60 1580.0 149 235
6SE7041-6WQ60
6SE7034-5WK60 452.0 152 238
6SE7041-1WL60 1080.0 156 196
6SE7042-4WR60 2450.0 158 -
6SE7041-2WL60 1230.0 160 198
6SE7043-3WR60 3270.0 162 -
6SE7044-1WR60 4090.0 166 -
6SE7044-8WR60 4900.0 170 -
6SE7045-7WR60 5720.0 174 -
6SE7046-5WR60 6540.0 178 -
6SE7036-5WS60 4940.0 180 246
6SE7038-6WS60 6540.0 183 249
6SE7041-1WS60 6160.0 187 252
6SE7041-2WS60 5840.0 189 254
6SE7042-1WN60 2050.0 191 241
6SE7042-3WN60 2340.0 193 243
9.4.2 Board configuration
During board configuration, the control electronics is informed in what

way the installed optional boards have to be configured. This step is
always necessary when CBx oder SLB optional boards are used.
The unit must be switched to the "Board configuration" status for this
purpose. This is done by selecting the "Board configuration" menu. In
this menu, parameters are set which are required for adapting the
optional boards to the specific application (e.g. bus addresses, baud
rates, etc.). After leaving the menu, the set parameters are transferred
and the optional boards are initialized.
P060 = 4 Select "Board configuration" menu
SCB inserted ? Serial communications board

no yes
SCB protocol
P696 = ?
0: SCI
1: USS 4-wire
2: USS 2-wire
3: Peer-to-Peer
CBx inserted ? Communications board (e.g. Profibus-DP)

no yes
P711.1...2 = ? Enter the CB parameters 1 to 11 necessary for the inserted

to communications boards CBx
P721.1...10 = ? The necessary CB parameters and their significance can be
derived from the function diagrams of the individual
communications boards.
SLB inserted ? SIMOLINK bus interface

no yes
Enter the SLB module address

P740 = ?
0: Unit operates as a dispatcher
greater than 0: Unit operates as a transceiver
Enter the SLB telegram failure time in ms
P741 = ?
0: No monitoring
greater than 0: Monitoring time in ms
Enter the SLB transmit power (for plastic fiber-optic cables)
P742 = ?
1: weak up to 15 m fiber-optic cable length
P740 > 0 P740 = 0 2: medium up to 25 m fiber-optic cable length
3: strong up to 40 m fiber-optic cable length
NOTE: If glass fiber-optic cables are used, the possible
lengths are increased by the factor 7.5.
Enter the number of modules (incl. dispatcher)
P743 = ?
in the SIMOLINK ring
P745 = ? Enter the number of channels per module
P746 = ? Enter the SIMOLINK cycle time in ms
P749.1...8 = ? Enter the SLB read addresses
CBx inserted ? Communications board (e.g. Profibus-DP)

no yes
P918.1...2 = ? Enter the CB bus addresses
P060 = 1 Return to the parameter menu
Board codes The visualization parameter r826.x is used for displaying the board
codes. These codes enable the type of installed electronic boards to be
determined.
Parameter Index Position
r826 1 Basic board
r826 2 Slot A
r826 3 Slot B
r826 4 Slot C
r826 5 Slot D
r826 6 Slot E
r826 7 Slot F
r826 8 Slot G
If a T100, T300 or TSY technology board (mounting position 2) or an

SCB1 or SCB2 (mounting position 2 or 3) is used, the board code can
be found in the following indices:
Parameter Index Position
r826 5 Mounting position 2
r826 7 Mounting position 3
General board Parameter value Meaning

codes
90 to 109 Mainboards or Control Unit
110 to 119 Sensor Board (SBx)
120 to 129 Serial Communication Board (Scx)
130 to 139 Technology Board
140 to 149 Communication Board (Cbx)
150 to 169 Special boards (Ebx, SLB)
Special board codes Board Meaning Parameter

value
CUVC Control Unit Vector Control 92
CUMC Control Unit Motion Control 93
CUMC+ Control Unit Motion Control Compact PLUS 94
CUVC+ Control Unit Vector Control Compact PLUS 95
CUPM Control Unit Motion Control Performance 2 96
CUMP Control Unit Motion Control Compact PLUS 97
Performance 2
CUSA Control Unit Sinus AFE 108
TSY Tacho and synchronization board 110
SBP Sensor Board Puls 111
SCB1 Serial Communication Board 1 (fiber-optic cable) 121
SCB2 Serial Communication Board 2 122
T100 Technology board 131
CBX Communication Board 14x
CBP Communication Board PROFIBUS 143
CBD Communication Board DeviceNet 145
CBC Communication Board CAN Bus 146
CBL Communication Board CC-Link 147
CBP2 Communication Board PROFIBUS 2 148
EB1 Expansion Board 1 151
EB2 Expansion Board 2 152
SLB SIMOLINK bus interface 161
9.4.3 Drive setting
The drive setting function extends the start-up facilities of quick

parameterization.
During the drive setting, the control electronics is informed about the
incoming voltage supply with which the drive converter is operating,
about the connected motor and about the motor encoder. In addition,
the motor control (V/f open-loop control or vector control) and the pulse
frequency are selected. If required, the parameters necessary for the
motor model can be calculated automatically. Furthermore, the
normalization values for current, voltage, frequency, speed and torque
signals are determined during the drive setting.
For start-up of the induction motor, first enter the manufacturer's
parameters completely (see below):
♦ In doing so, you must observe whether the induction motor has a
star or a delta connection.
♦ You must always use the S1 data from the rating plate.
♦ You must enter the r.m.s. base frequency of the rated voltage and
not the total r.m.s. value (including harmonic content) for converter
operation.
♦ You must always enter the correct rated motor current P102 (rating
plate). If there are two different rated currents on the rating plate for
special fan motors, you must use the value for M ~ n for constant
torque (not M ~ n2). A higher torque can be set with the torque and
active-current limits.
♦ The accuracy of the rated motor current has a direct effect on the
torque accuracy, as the rated torque is normalized to the rated
current. If a rated current is increased by 4 %, this will also
approximately result in a 4 % increase in the torque (referred to the
rated motor torque).
♦ For group drives, you have to enter the total rated current
P102 = x*Imot,rated
♦ If the rated magnetizing current is known, you should enter it during
the drive setting in P103 (in % Imot,rated). If this is done, the results
of the "Automatic parameterization" (P115 = 1) will be more precise.
♦ As the rated magnetizing current P103 (not to be confused with the

no-load current during operation with rated frequency P107 and
rated voltage P101) is usually not known, you can first enter 0.0 %.
With the aid of the power factor (cosPHI) P104, an approximate
value is calculated and displayed in r119.
Experience shows that the approximation supplies values which are
rather on the large side in the case of motors with a high rating (over
800 kW), whereas it supplies values which are slightly too low in the
case of motors with low rating (below 22 kW).
The magnetizing current is defined as a field-generating current
component during operation at the rated point of the machine
(U = P101, f = P107, n = P108, i = P102).
♦ The rated frequency P107 and the rated speed P108 automatically
result in the calculation of the pole pair number P109. If the
connected motor is designed as a generator and the generator data
are on the rating plate (oversynchronous rated speed), you have to
correct the pole pair number manually (increase by 1 if the motor is
at least 4-pole), so that the rated slip (r110) can be correctly
calculated.
♦ In the case of asynchronous motors, instead of the synchronous no-
load speed, enter the real motor rated speed in P108, i.e. the slip
frequency at nominal load has to be derived from parameters
P107...P109.
♦ The rated motor slip (1 - P108/60 x P109/P107) should usually be
greater than 0.35 % x P107.
These low values are, however, only achieved in the case of motors
with a very high rating (above approx. 1000 kW).
Motors with average rating (45..800 kW) have slip values around
2.0...0.6 %.
Motors with low rating (below 22 kW) can also have slip values up to
10 %.
♦ It is possible to achieve a more accurate evaluation of the rated slip
after standstill measurement (P115 = 2) by taking into account the
temperature evaluation for the rotor resistance P127.
On cold motors (approx. 20 °C), the value is usually around 70 %
(± 10 %) and on warm motors (operating temperature) around
100 % (± 10 %). If there are any large differences, you can proceed
on the assumption that the rated frequency P107 or the rated speed
P108 do not correspond to the real values.
♦ If the rated motor frequency (engineered!) is below 8 Hz, you have
to set P107 = 8.0Hz in the drive setting. The rated motor voltage
P101 has to be calculated in the ratio 8 Hz / fMot,N and the rated
motor speed P108 should result in the same slip:
P108 = ((8 Hz - P107old) x 60 / P109) + P108old.
WARNING During motor identification (P115 = 2...7) inverter pulses are released
and the drive rotates!
For reasons of safety, identification should first be carried out without
coupling of the load.
P060 = 5 Select "Drive setting" menu
Output filter 0 = without output filter

P068 = ?
1 = with sinusoidal output filter
2 = with dv/dt output filter
Input unit line voltage in V
P071 = ?
AC units: r.m.s. alternating voltage
DC units: DC link voltage
Enter type of motor

P095 = ?
2: Compact asynchronous motor 1PH7(=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
P095=2 P095 = P095=11 10: Async./Sync. IEC (international standard)
10,12,13 11: Async./Sync. NEMA (US standard)
12: Sync. motor, separately excited (special applications,
not v/f characteristic)
13: Sync. motor, permanently excited (special applications,
not v/f characteristic)
Enter the code number for the connected motor of the
P097 = ?
Range 1PH7(=1PA6)/1PL6/1PH4
(see "Motor list" section)
(Automatic parameter assignment is implemented as soon as
the settings P095 = 2 and P097 > 0 have been made)
Enter the type of open/closed-loop control
P100 = ?
0: v/f control + n control
P095=2 1: v/f control
P097>0
2: v/f control, textile
3: Speed control without tachometer (f control)
4: Speed control with tachometer (n control)
5: Torque control (T control)
Note: For motor ratings over approx. 200 kW one of the
vector control types should be used (P100 > 2).
Enter the rated motor voltage in V

P101 = ?
as per rating plate
Enter the rated motor current in A

P102 = ?
as per rating plate
(Group drives: total of all motor currents)
Enter the motor magnetizing current as a % of the rated
P103 = ?
motor current
IEC NEMA If value is not known, set P103 = 0, the value is then
automatically calculated when you exit Drive setting (see r119).
IEC motor: Cos (phi) as per rating plate

P104=? P105=?
NEMA motor: rated output [Hp]
(Group drives: total of all output ratings)
NEMA motor: Enter the motor efficiency in %
P106=?
as per rating plate
Enter the rated motor frequency in Hz

P107 = ?
as per rating plate
Enter the rated motor speed in rpm

P108 = ?
as per rating plate
Enter the motor pole pair number

P109 = ?
(This is calculated automatically)
Enter the rated motor torque in Nm

P113 = ?
as per rating plate or motor catalog (this is only used for
P100=0,1,2 P100 = 3,4,5 normalizing the process data and visualization parameters)
P100>2
P100=1,2 WARNING!
P114 = ?
INCORRECT SETTINGS CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Process-related conditions for closed-loop control
0: Drive for standard applications (e.g. pumps)
1: Drive with strong torsion, gear play, large moments of inertia
(e.g. paper machine)
2: Drive for very dynamic accelerations (without load inertia)
(e.g. shears)
3: Drive for strong schock stressing (e.g. roll drive)
4: Drive with high smooth running characteristics at low speeds.
5: Drives with modest response requirements, which can be
optimized in their efficiency with frequent part-load operation.
6: Drive with high starting torque.
7: Dynamic torque response in field-weakening range
See next section for description
P115 = 1 Calculate motor model for "Automatic parameterization"

Reference values P350 to P354 are set to the rated motor
values.
The motor parameters and controller settings are calculated.
Select the motor encoder

P130 = ?
5: External SBP board
P130 = P130 = P130 = 10: Without motor encoder
10,13,14 5 11,12,15,16 11: Pulse encoder (default if P095=2, P097>0)
12: Pulse encoder with control track
13: Analog input 1
14: Analog input 2
15: Pulse encoder with zero track
16: Pulse encoder with zero and control track
WARNING
Please check that the encoder has been connected
correctly!
Pulse encoder: Do not mix up tracks A and B!
Analog tachometer: Check voltage polarity (direction of
rotation) and amplitude!
In the event of faults the drive may involuntarily race to
maximum speed! For testing the encoder see parameter
P115=7 and P115=3 and 4.
Enter the pulse number/revolution of the pulse encoder

P151 = ?
P131 = ? Select TmpSensor

0: KTY84 (evaluation via P380/P381)
3: PT100 (evaluation only possible for SBP)
Configuration of setpoint encoder
P139 = ?
Setpoint encoder pulse number

P140 = ?
Reference frequency of setpoint encoder

P141 = ?
P100 =
0,1,2
Characteristic 0: Linear characteristic (constant torque drives)
P330 = ?
1: Parabolic characteristic (fans/pumps)
Release the edge modulation systems (FLM)

P339 = ?
0: All systems
1: Edge modulation systems from 60 Hz
2: Edge modulation systems from 100 Hz
3: No edge modulation systems
4: Overmodulated space vector modulation
Enter the pulse frequency in kHz

P340 = ?
Pulse frequency for asynchronous space vector modulation
Notes:
- The adjustable range depends on the converter/inverter
- An increase in the pulse frequency results in a reduction
of the maximum output current
(see "Technical Data", derating curves)
Enter the reference value for all current quantities in A

P350 = ?
(Normalization quantity for current limitations as well as current
setpoints and actual values) (see example in section 9.2.1)
Enter the reference value for all voltage quantities in V
P351 = ?
(Normalization quantity for voltage limitations as well as voltage
setpoints and actual values)
Enter the reference value for all frequency quantities in Hz

P352 = ?
(Normalization quantities for frequency limitations, frequency
setpoints and actual values) (see example in section 9.2.1)
Note: The parameter P353 is automatically adjusted.
Enter the reference value for all speed quantities in rpm
P353 = ?
(Normalization quantity for speed limitations, speed setpoints
and actual values) (see example in section 9.2.1)
Note: The parameter P352 is automatically adjusted.
Enter the reference value for all torque quantities in Nm
P354 = ?
(Normalization quantity for torque limitations, torque setpoints
and actual values) (see example in section 9.2.1)
Enter the sampling time T0 in ms

P357 = ?
The sampling time T0 is for determining the calculating
frequency of all functions.
The sampling times T1...T19 are multiples of sampling time T0
Note: A very short sampling time T0 can lead to a calcu-
lation time overload if several function blocks are
activated at the same time!
Thermal motor System with motor protection according to UL regulation?

protection desired ? The motor temperature is calculated via the motor current.
no yes (Motor overload protection in accordance with UL regulation
activated as default setting!)
Enter the motor temperature for output of the alarm A023
P380 = ?
"Motor overtemperature" (evaluation with KTY84)
(PTC evaluation: P380 = 1 °C)
Enter the motor temperature for output of the fault F020
P381 = ?
"Motor overtemperature" (evaluation with KTY84)
(PTC evaluation: P381 = 1 °C)
P095=2
P097>0
Specify motor cooling
P382 = ?
0: self-ventilated
1: force-ventilated (default if P095 = 2, P097 > 0)
Enter the thermal time constant of the motor in s
P383 = 0 P383 = ?
(< 100 s: monitoring deactivated)
(default if P095 = 2, P097 > 0)
P384.02 = 0 P384.02 = ? Enter the motor load limit 1...300 %
Enter the maximum frequency or speed in positive

P452 = ?
direction of rotation in %
The value is referred to P352 (reference frequency) and P353
(reference speed)
Enter the maximum frequency or speed in negative
P453 = ?
direction of rotation in %
The value is referred to P352 (reference frequency) and P353
(reference speed)
P060 = 1 Return to the parameter menu
Note
When the "Drive settings" menu is exited, the entered
parameter values are checked for their plausibility. Non-
plausible parameter settings result in a fault. The erroneously
set parameters are entered in parameter r949 (fault value).
P128 = ? Enter the maximum output current in A
Enter the acceleration time from standstill up to reference

P462 = ?
frequency (P352)
Enter the unit for acceleration time P462

P463 = ?
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
Enter the deceleration time from reference frequency

P464 = ?
(P352) up to standstill
Enter the unit for deceleration time P464

P465 = ?
0 = Seconds
1 = Minutes
2 = Hours
Sinusoidal filter (P068=1)

or
synchronous motor?
no yes
Calculate motor model "Motor identification at standstill"

P115 = 2
NOTICE:
Current flows through the motor and the rotor rotates!
After pressing the "P" key, the alarm message "A087" appears.
The converter must be turned on within 20 secs!
Analog tachometer? Analog tachometer present?

no yes
Adjust Adjust tachometer

tachometer Tachometer to ATI: See operating instructions for ATI
Tachometer to terminal strip: See function diagrams for analog
inputs
f, n, T control?
(P100 = 3, 4, 5)
no yes
Calculate motor model "No-load measurement"

P115 = 4
NOTICE: Current flows through the motor and the rotor rotates!
After "P" key is pressed, the alarm message "A080" appears.
The converter must be switched on within 20 seconds!
Wait until the converter is "Ready for ON" again (°009)
Wait
For fault "Fxxx", refer to chapter "Faults and alarms"
Enter the dynamic performance of the speed control circuit

P536 = ?
in %
Important for subsequent controller optimization.
Calculate motor model "Controller optimization"
P115 = 5
NOTICE: Current flows through the motor, the rotor rotates!
After "P" is pressed, the alarm message "A080" appears.
The converter must be switched on within 20 seconds!
Wait until the converter is powered-down
Wait
(Operating status "Ready for ON" (°009))
For fault "Fxxx", see chapter "Faults and alarms"
Finished
9.5 Notes regarding parameterization

The parameter im Kompendium list covers the setting parameters and
visualization parameters of all available motor types (induction motors
and synchronous motors), as well as all possible open-loop and closed-
loop control modes (e.g. V/f characteristic, speed control).
The constellation under which this parameter is influenced or whether it
is displayed at all is indicated under "Preconditions" in the parameter
description.
Unless otherwise specified, all percentage values refer to the reference
quantities in P350 to P354.
If reference quantities are changed, this will also change the
significance of the parameters with percentage normalization
(e.g. P352 = Maximum frequency).
Reference quantities Reference variables are intended as an aid to presenting setpoint and
actual value signals in a uniform manner. This also applies to fixed
settings entered as a "percentage". A value of 100 % corresponds to a
process data value of 4000h, or 4000 0000 h in the case of double
values.
All setpoint and actual value signals (e.g. set speed and actual speed)
refer to the physically applicable reference variables. In this respect, the
following parameters are available:
P350 Reference current in A

P351 Reference voltage in V
P352 Reference frequency in Hz
P353 Reference speed in rpm
P354 Reference torque in Nm
In quick parameterization mode and in automatic parameter

assignment mode (P115 = 1(2,3)), these reference variables are set to
the motor ratings. In case of automatic parameter assignment, this
occurs only if the "Drive setting" converter status is activated.
Speed and The reference speed and reference frequency are always connected by
frequency reference the pole pair number.
values
60
P353 = P352 ×
P109
If one of the two parameters is changed, the other is calculated using
this equation.
Since this calculation is not made on download (see section 9.2.3),
these two quantities must always be loaded in the correct relationship.
If the setpoint and actual control signals are related to a desired
reference speed in rpm, P353 must be set accordingly (P352 is
calculated automatically). If a rotational frequency in Hz is to be used
as the reference (calculated using the pole pair number P109), P352
must be set.
Torque reference Since the torque signals and parameters in the control system are
value always specified and displayed as a percentage, the ratio of the
reference torque (P354) to the rated motor torque (P113) is always
important for accuracy. If both values are the same, a display value of
100 % corresponds exactly to the rated motor torque, irrespective of the
values actually entered in P354 and P113.
For purposes of clarity, however, it is advisable to enter the true rated
torque of the drive in P113 (e.g. from catalog data).
PW (mot, rated)
P113 =
2⋅π⋅n(mot,rated)
60
Reference power The reference power (in W) is calculated from the reference torque and
value reference speed:
P354 ⋅ P353 ⋅ 2 ⋅ π
R W ,ref =
60
Power values for the control system are also always specified as a
percentage referred to the specified reference power. The ratio of
PW,ref / Pmot,rated can be used for conversion to the rated motor
power.
P113 ⋅ 2 ⋅ π ⋅ P108
Pmot,rated =
60
Reference current If the reference torque P354 is increased, for example, the reference
value current P350 must be increased by the same factor, because the
current increases at higher torque.
NOTE Setting and visualization parameters in engineering units (e.g. Imax in

A) must also be no more than twice the reference value.
If the reference quantities are changed, the physical value of all
parameters specified as a percentage also changes; that is all the
parameters of the setpoint channel, as well as the maximum power for
the control system (P258, P259) and the static current for frequency
control (P278, P279).
If the reference values and the rated motor values are identical (e.g.
following quick parameterization), signal representation (e.g. via
connectors) up to twice the rated motor values is possible. If this is not
sufficient, you must change to the "Drive setting" menu (P060 = 5) to
change the reference quantities.
Example P107 = 52.00 Hz Rated motor frequency

P108 = 1500.0 rpm Rated motor speed
P109 = 2 Motor pole pair number
Pre-assignment:
P352 = 52.00 Hz Reference frequency
P353 = 1560 rpm Reference speed
For a maximum speed of four times the rated motor speed you must set
the reference speed to at least 3000 rpm. The reference frequency is
adjusted automatically (P352 = P353 / 60 x P109).
P352 = 100.00 Hz
P353 = 3000 rpm
A setpoint speed of 1500 rpm corresponds to a setpoint frequency of

50.00 Hz or an automation value of 50.0 %.
The representation range ends at 6000 rpm (2 x 3000 rpm).
This does not affect the internal representation range of the control
system. Since the internal control signals refer to the rated motor
quantities, there is always sufficient reserve control capacity.
The reference speed should normally be set to the desired maximum
speed.
Reference frequencies of P352 = P107, P352 = 2 x P107,
P352 = 4 x P107 are favorable for the calculating time.
For a maximum torque of three times the rated motor torque (P113) it is
advisable to set the reference torque to between twice and four times
the value of parameter P113 (for four to eight times the representation
range).
Separately excited Function diagrams and start-up instructions for separately excited
synchronous synchronous motors (with damping cage and excitation via sliprings)
motors are available as separate instructions.
The following parameters are only effective for these synchronous
motors:
P75 to P88; P155 to r168, P187, P258, P274, P297, P298, P301, r302,
P306 to P312.
Automatic The following parameters are calculated or set to fixed values during
parameterization automatic parameterization (P115 = 1):
and motor P116 P236 P295 P337
identification
P117 P240 P303 P339
P120 P258 P306 P344
P121 P259 P313 P347
P122 P273 P315 P348
P127 P274 P316 P388
P128 P278 P319 P392
P161 P279 P322 P396
P215 P283 P325 P471
P216 P284 P326 P525
P217 P287 P334 P536
P223 P291 P335 P602
P235 P293 P336 P603
♦ P350 to P354 are only set to the rated motor quantities in the
converter status "Drive setting" (P060 = 5) or "Quick
parameterization (P060 = 3).
♦ In converter status "Drive setting" (but not in "Ready" status),
parameters are assigned automatically on selection of standstill
measurement P115 = 2, 3.
♦ During the standstill measurement P115 = 2, 3, the following
parameters are measured or calculated:
• P103, P120, P121, P122, P127, P347, P349.
The controller settings resulting from these values are in: P283,
P284, P315, P316.
♦ During the rotating measurement P115 = 3, 4, P103 and P120 are
adjusted.
♦ During the n/f controller optimization P115 = 5, the parameters
P116, P223, P235, P236, P240 and P471 are determined.
In principle, automatic parameterization (P115 = 1) or motor
identification (P115 = 2, 3) should be carried out as soon as one of the
following parameters are adjusted in the converter status "Drive setting"
(P060 = 5):
P068 = Output filter
P095 = Motor type
P097 = Motor number
P100 = Control type
P101...P109 = Motor rating plate data
P339 = Release of modulation system
P340 = Pulse frequency
P357 = Sampling time
In exceptional cases this is not necessary:

♦ If P068 is only adjusted between 0 and 2 (dv/dt filter).
♦ If P340 is adjusted in integer increments, e.g. from 2.5 kHz to
5.0 kHz...7.5 kHz... etc.
♦ If P339 is not set to over-modulated space vector modulation; if
P339 = 4, 5 (over-modulated space vector modulation), the
overrange limit P342 must also be reduced to limit torque ripple and
motor heating.
♦ If changeover is made between speed and torque control
(P100 = 4, 5).
♦ If changeover is made between speed and frequency control and
the following parameters are adapted:
f-control (P100 = 3) n-control (P100 = 4)
P315 = EMF Reg.Kp 2 x Kp Kp
P223 = Smooth.n/f(act) ≥ 0 ms ≥ 4 ms
P216 = Smooth. n/f(pre) ≥ 4.8 ms ≥ 0.0 ms
P222 = Src n/f(act) KK0000 KK0000 (KK0091)
The speed controller dynamic response may have to be reduced in the

case of encoder-less speed control (frequency control) (Reduce gain
(P235); increase Tn (P240)).
Temperature Activation of the measured value or PTC thermistor monitoring for the
monitoring of the motor causes different fault and alarm signals depending on the setting
motor of parameters P380 and P381. These are listed in the following table:
P380 / P381 / Sensor r009 Alarm A23 in Alarm A23 in Fault F20 in Fault F20 in
°C °C ready operation ready operation
=0 =0 KTY84 for RL if P386 = - - - -
adapt. 2
=0 =1 PTC no - - - yes 1)
=1 =0 PTC no yes 1) yes 1) - -
=1 =1 PTC no yes 1) - - yes 1)
=0 >1 KTY84 yes - - - yes 3)
>1 =0 KTY84 yes yes 3) yes 3) yes 4) yes 2)
>1 >1 KTY84 yes yes 3) yes 3) yes 4) yes 3)
=1 >1 KTY84 no yes 1) - - yes 3) 2)
>1 =1 KTY84 no yes 3) yes 3) yes 4) yes 2)
1) Alarm or fault are triggered on violation of the PTC thermistor temperature or on a

cable break (not a cable short circuit).
2) Fault is only triggered on cable break or cable short-circuit.
3) Fault or alarm on violation of the temperature limit..
4) Fault is only triggered on cable short-circuit.
9.5.1 Drive setting according to process-related boundary conditions
In order to support start-up, process-related characteristics can be

entered in P114. In a subsequent automatic parameterization
(P115 = 1) or motor identification (P115 = 2, 3) and controller
optimization (P115 = 3, 5), parameter adjustments are made in the
closed-loop control which are advantageous for the selected case, as
experience has shown.
The parameter adjustments can be taken from the following table. The
table clearly shows which parameters have a decisive influence on the
closed-loop control. The values themselves are understood to be
qualitative values and can be further adjusted according to the process-
related requirements.
If the type of process-related boundary conditions is not evident in the
current case (e.g. high smooth running characteristics at low speeds
with simultaneously fast acceleration processes), the parameter
settings can also be combined (manually). In any case, it is always
sensible to perform start-up with the standard setting in order to then
set the indicated parameters one after the other.
The settings of P114 = 2...4 are only possible if no gearless conditions
are present.
P114 = 0: Standard drive (e.g. pumps, fans)

1: Torsion, gear play and large moments of inertia
(e.g. paper machines)
2: Acceleration drives with constant inertia
(e.g. shears)
3: High load surge requirements
(in the case of f-control only possible from approx.
20%fmot,n)
4: High smooth running characteristics at low speeds
(in the case of n-control; with a high encoder pulse
numberl)
5: Efficiency optimization at partial load by flux reduction
(low dynamic loading drives)
6: High start-up torque (heavy-duty start-up)
7: Dynamic torque response in the field-weakening range
(e.g. motor test beds)
Only deviations from the standard setting (P114 = 0) are indicated:
P114 = 0 P114 = 1 P114 = 2 P114 = 3 P114 = 4 P114 = 5 P114 = 6 P114 = 7
P216=Smooth n/f(FWD) 0ms (n-ctrl.) 4.8ms

4ms (f-ctrl.) (n-ctrl.)
P217=Slip Fail Corr'n. 0=off 2=on (n-ctrl) 2=on
P223=Smooth n/f(act) 4ms (n-ctrl.) 100ms
0ms (f-ctrl.)
P235=n/f-Reg Gain1 3.0 or 5.0 12.0 (n-ctrl.)
P236=n/f-Reg Gain2 3.0 or 5.0 12.0 (n-ctrl.)
P273=Smooth Isq(set) 6*P357 (T0) 3*P357
P240=n/f-Reg Tn 400ms 40ms (n-ctrl.)
P279=Torque (dynamic) 20.0% 80% (f-ctrl.)
P287=Smooth Vd(act) 9 0 0
P291=FSetp Flux(set) 100% 110%
P295=Efficiency Optim. 100%=off 99.9% 50%
P303=Smooth Flux(set) 10-20ms 60ms 100 (n-ctrl.)
500 (f-ctrl.)
P315=EMF Reg Gain Gain(n) 1.5*Gain(n) 1.5*Gain(n)
(f-ctrl.) (f-ctrl.)
P339=ModSystRelease 0=All syst 3=only RZM 3=only RZM 3=only RZM 3=only RZM 3=only RZM
P344=ModDepthHeadrm 0.0% 3.0% 3.0% 30.0%
P536=n/f RegDyn(set) 50% 20% 100 (n-ctrl.) 200 (n-ctrl.) 200 (n-ctrl.) 25% 100 (n-ctrl.) 100% (n-ctrl.)
50% (f-ctrl.) 100 (f-ctrl.) 50% (f-ctrl.) 50% (f-ctrl.)
RZM = Space vector modulation
The gain Kp of the speed controller (P235, P236) depends on the

inertia of the drive and has to be adapted if necessary.
Symmetrical optimum: P235 = 2 x P116 / P240

Kp = 2 x Tstart-up / Tn
The start-up time is the time taken by the drive to accelerate to rated
speed when the rated torque is specified. This is determined during
automatic speed controller optimization.
9.5.2 Changes to the function selection parameter (P052) VC(former)
The function selection parameter P052 of the firmware versions for the
previous MASTERDRIVES VC units was used to select the various
special functions and start-up steps. In order to make this important
parameter more comprehensible for the user, the function groups
"Special functions" and "Start-up steps" in the CUVC firmware have
now been stored in two different parameters as follows:
P060 Menu selection

(Special functions)
P052 Function selection
P115 Calculation of
motor parameters
Fig. 9-6 Division of parameter P052(former) into P060 and P115
In addition to this, the new special function "User parameter" has been
introduced, and the special function "Drive setting" (P052 = 5) has been
subdivided into the functions "Quick parameterization" and "Drive
setting". The new special function "Quick parameterization" involves
parameterization for standard applications, and the new special
function "Drive setting" involves parameterization for expert
applications.
The special function "Download/Upread" (P052 = 3) has been
subdivided into the functions "Download" and "Upread".
P060 Menu selection P052 (former) Function selection

0= User parameter -- See parameter list
P060
1= Parameter menu 0= Return
2= Fixed settings 1) 1= Param. Reset
3= Quick parameterization 5= Drive Setting
4= Board configuration 4= HW Config.
5= Drive setting 5= Drive Setting
6= Download 3= Download
7= Upread 3= Download
8= Power section definition 2= MLFB input
1) Selection in the factory setting menu (P366 Factory setting type, activation with P970)
P115 Calculation of motor model P052 Function

(former) selection
1= Automatic parameterization 6= Auto Param.
2= Motor identification at standstill 7= Mot ID Stop
3= Complete motor identification 8= Mot ID All
4= No-load measurement 9= No Load Meas
5= n/f controller optimization 10= Reg Optim.
6= Self-test 11= Auto Test
7= Tachometer test 12= Tach Test
The new special function P060 = 0 (User parameter) enables the user
to put together an important list of parameters especially for his own
application.
When P060 = 0 (User parameter) is selected, apart from parameters
P053, P060 and P358, only those parameters whose numbers have
been entered in indices 4 to 100 of parameter P360 are visible.
07.2005 Control word and status word
10 Control word and status word
10.1 Description of the control word bits

The operating statuses can be read in visualization parameter r001:
e.g. READY TO POWER-UP: r001 = 009
The function sequences are described in the sequence in which they
are actually realized.
Function diagrams 180 and 190 refer to further function diagrams in the
Compendium.
Bit 0: ON/OFF 1 command (↑ "ON") / (L "OFF1")
Condition Positive edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY TO POWER-

UP condition (009).
Result ♦ PRECHARGING (010)
Main contactor (option)/bypass contactor, if available, are switched-
in (closed).
The DC link is pre-charged.
♦ READY (011)
If the drive was last powered-down with "OFF2", the next condition
is only selected after the de-energization time (P603) has expired
since the last shutdown
♦ GROUND FAULT TEST (012), only when the ground fault test has
been selected (P375).
♦ RESTART ON THE FLY (013), if restart on the fly (control word bit
23 via P583) has been enabled.
♦ RUN (014).
Condition LOW signal and P100 = 3, 4 (closed-loop frequency/speed control)
Result ♦ OFF1 (015), if the drive is in a status where the inverter is enabled.
• For P100 = 3, 4 and slave drive, the system waits until the
higher-level open-loop/closed-loop control shuts down the drive.
• For P100 = 3, 4 and master drive, the setpoint at the ramp-
function generator input is inhibited (setpoint = 0), so that the
drive decelerates along the parameterized down ramp (P464) to
the OFF shutdown frequency (P800).
After the OFF delay time (P801) has expired, the inverter pulses are
inhibited, and the main contactor (option/bypass contactor), if
available, are opened.
If the OFF1 command is withdrawn again when the drive is ramping-
down, (e.g. as the result of an ON command), ramp-down is
interrupted, and the drive goes back into the RUN (014) condition.
Control word and status word 07.2005
♦ For PRECHARGING (010), READY (011), RESTART-ON-THE-FLY

(013) or MOT-ID-STANDSTILL (018), the inverter pulses are
inhibited, and the main contactor (option)/bypass contactor, if
available, is opened.
♦ SWITCH-ON INHIBIT (008); compare status word 1, bit 6
♦ READY-TO-POWER-UP (009), if "OFF2" or "OFF3" are not present.
Condition Low signal and P100 = 5 (closed-loop torque control)
Result ♦ An OFF2 command (electrical) is executed.
Bit 1: OFF2 command (L "OFF2") electrical
Condition LOW signal

Result ♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited, and the main contactor
(option)/bypass contactor, if available, are opened.
♦ POWER-ON INHIBIT (008), until the command is removed.
Note The OFF2 command is simultaneously connected from three sources

(P555, P556 and P557)!
Bit 2: OFF3 command (L "OFF3") (fast stop)

Result ♦ This command has two possible effects:
• DC braking is enabled (P395 = 1):
DC BRAKING (017)
The drive decelerates along the parameterized downramp for
OFF3 (P466) until the frequency for the start of DC braking is
reached (P398).
The inverter pulses are then inhibited for the duration of the de-
energization time (P603).
After this, the drive DC brakes with an adjustable braking current
(P396) for a braking time which can be parameterized (P397).
The inverter pulses are then inhibited and the main contactor
(option)/bypass contactor, if available, is opened.
• DC braking is not enabled (P395 = 0):
The setpoint is inhibited at the ramp-function generator input
(setpoint = 0), so that the drive decelerates along the
parameterized downramp for OFF3 (P466) to the OFF shutdown
frequency (P800).
The inverter pulses are inhibited after the OFF delay time (P801)
has expired, and the main/bypass contactor, if used, is opened. If
the OFF3 command is withdrawn while the drive is decelerating,
the drive still continues to accelerate.
♦ For PRE-CHARGING (010), READY (011), RESTART-ON-THE-

FLY (013) or MOT-ID STANDSTILL (018), the inverter pulses are
inhibited, and the main/bypass contactor, if used, is opened.
♦ If the drive operates as slave drive, when an OFF3 command is
issued, it automatically switches-over to the master drive.
♦ POWER-ON inhibit (008), until the command is withdrawn.
NOTE The OFF3 command is simultaneously effective from three sources

(P558, P559 and P560)!
Priority of the OFF commands: OFF2 > OFF3 > OFF1
Bit 3: Inverter enable command (H "inverter enable")/(L "inverter inhibit")
Condition HIGH signal, READY (011) and the de-energization time (P603) has
expired since the last time that the drive was shutdown.
Result ♦ RUN (014)
The inverter pulses are enabled and the setpoint is approached via
the ramp-function generator.
Result ♦ For RESTART-ON-THE-FLY (013), RUN (014), KINETIC
BUFFERING with pulse enable, OPTIMIZATION OF THE SPEED
CONTROLLER CIRCUIT (019) or SYNCHRONIZATION (020):
♦ The drive changes over into the READY (011), condition, and the
inverter pulses are inhibited.
♦ If OFF1 is active (015), the inverter pulses are inhibited, the
main/bypass contactor, if used, is opened, and the drive goes into
the POWER-ON INHIBIT (008) condition.
♦ If OFF3 is active (016 / fast stop), the inverter inhibit command is
ignored, fast stop is continued and, after shutdown (P800, P801),
the inverter pulses are inhibited.
Bit 4: Ramp-function generator inhibit command (L "RFG inhibit")
Condition LOW signal in the RUN (014) condition.

Result ♦ The ramp-function generator output is set to setpoint = 0.
Bit 5: Ramp-function generator hold command (L "RFG hold")
Condition LOW signal in the RUN (014) condition.

Result ♦ The actual setpoint is "frozen at the ramp-function generator output".
Bit 6: Setpoint enable command (H "setpoint enable")
Condition HIGH signal and the de-energization time have expired (P602).
Result ♦ The setpoint at the ramp-function generator input is enabled.
Bit 7: Acknowledge command (↑ "Acknowledge")
Condition Rising (positive) edge change from L to H (L → H) in the FAULT

condition (007).
Result ♦ All of the current faults are deleted after they have been previously
transferred into the diagnostics memory.
♦ POWER-ON INHIBIT (008), if no actual faults are present.
♦ FAULT (007), if there are no faults.
NOTE The Acknowledge command is simultaneously effective from the three

sources (P565, P566 and P567) and always from the PMU!
Bit 8: Inching 1 ON command (↑ "Inching 1 ON") / (L "Inching 1 OFF")
Condition Positive (rising) edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY TO

POWER-UP (009) condition.
Result ♦ An ON command is automatically executed (refer to control word bit
0), and inching frequency 1 (P448) is enabled in the setpoint
channel.
The ON/OFF1 command (bit 0) is ignored for active inching
operation!
The system must wait until the de-energization time (P603) has
expired
Result ♦ An OFF1 command is automatically executed (refer to control word
bit 0).
Bit 9: Inching 2 ON command (↑ "Inching 2 ON") / (L "Inching 2 OFF")
Condition Rising (positive) edge change from L to H (L → H) in the READY TO

POWER-UP (009) condition.
Result ♦ An ON command is automatically executed (refer to control board
bit 0), and inching frequency 2 (P449) is enabled in the setpoint
channel.
The ON/OFF1 command (bit 0) is ignored if inching is active.
The system must wait until the de-energization time (P603) has
expired.
Result ♦ An OFF1 command is automatically executed (refer to control word
bit 0).
Bit 10: Control from the PLC command (H "control from the PLC")
Condition HIGH signal; the process data PZD (control word, setpoints) are only
evaluated if the command has been accepted; this data is sent via the
SST1 interface of the CU, the CB/TB interface (option) and the
SST/SCB interface (option).
Result ♦ If several interfaces are used, only the process data of the interfaces
are evaluated, which send an H signal.
♦ For an L signal, the last values are received in the appropriate dual
port RAM of the interface.
NOTE An H signal appears in the visualization parameter r550 "control word

1", if one of the interfaces sends an H signal!
Bit 11: Clockwise rotating field command (H "clockwise rotating field")
Condition HIGH signal

Result ♦ The setpoint is influenced in conjunction with bit 12 "counter-
clockwise rotating field“.
Bit 12: Counter-clockwise rotating field command (H "counter-clockwise rotating field")

Result ♦ The setpoint is influenced in conjunction with bit 11 "clockwise-
rotating field".
NOTE The counter-clockwise rotating field and the clockwise rotating

field command have no influence on supplementary setpoint 2, which
is added after the ramp-function generator (RFG)!
Bit 13: Command to raise the motorized potentiometer (H "raise motorized

potentiometer")

Result ♦ The motorized potentiometer in the setpoint channel is driven in
conjunction with bit 14 "motorized potentiometer, lower".
Bit 14: Command to lower the motorized potentiometer (H "lower motorized

potentiometer")

Result ♦ The motorized potentiometer in the setpoint channel is driven in
conjunction with bit 13 "raise motorized potentiometer".
Bit 15: Command external fault 1 (L "External fault 1")

Result ♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F035).
The inverter pulses are inhibited, the main contactor/bypass
contactor, if used, is opened.
Bit 16: Function data set FDS bit 0 command
Result ♦ In conjunction with bit 17 "FDS BIT 1" one of the four possible
function data sets is energized.
Bit 17: Function data set FDS bit 1 command
Result ♦ In conjunction with bit 16 "FDS BIT 0" one of the four possible
function data sets is energized.
Bit 18: Motor data set, MDS bit 0 command
Condition READY TO POWER-UP (009), PRE-CHARGING (010) or READY

(011)
Result ♦ One of the four possible motor data sets is energized in conjunction
with bit 19 "MDS BIT 1".
Bit 19: Motor data set, MDS bit 1 command
Condition READY TO POWER-UP (009), PRE-CHARGING (010) or READY

(011)
Result ♦ One of the four possible motor data sets is energized in conjunction
with bit 18 "MDS BIT 0".
Bit 20: Fixed setpoint FSW bit 0 (LSB) command
Result ♦ In conjunction with bit 21 "FSW BIT 1", one of the four possible fixed
setpoints is energized to input as percentage fixed setpoints,
referred to the reference frequency P352 or reference speed P353.
Bit 21: Fixed setpoint FSW bit 1 (MSB) command
Result ♦ In conjunction with bit 20 "FSW BIT 0" one of the four possible fixed
setpoints is energized for input as percentage fixed setpoints,
referred to the reference frequency P352 or the reference speed
P353.
Bit 22: Synchronizing enable command (H "synchronizing enable")
Condition ♦ For converter sychronization (P534 = 1):

HIGH signal, TSY (option) available and P100 = 2 (V/f characteristic
for textile applications).
♦ For line synchronization (P534 = 2):
HIGH signal, TSY (option) P100 = 1, 2 or 3
Result ♦ The command enables the synchronizing function.
Bit 23: Restart-on-the-fly enable command (H "restart-on-the-fly enable")

Result ♦ The command enables the restart-on-the-fly function.
Bit 24: Droop/technology controller enable command (H "droop/technology controller

enable")

Result ♦ The command enables the droop function, if P100 (open-
loop/closed-loop control type) is assigned 3 (closed-loop frequency
control) or 4 (closed-loop speed control), parameter P246 <> 0 and
the inverted pulses of the drive converter are enabled.
The speed/frequency controller output, fed back as negative signal
to the speed/frequency setpoint, can be set via parameter P245
(source steady-state) and P246 (scaling steady-state)
Bit 25: Controller enable command (H "controller enable")
Condition HIGH signal and the drive converter inverter pulses are enabled.
Result ♦ The speed controller output is enabled for the appropriate control
type (P100 = 0,4,5).
Bit 26: Command, external fault 2 (L "External fault 2")
Condition LOW signal; it is only activated from the READY (011) condition
onwards and after an additional time delay of 200 ms.
Result ♦ FAULT (007) and fault message (F036).
The inverter pulses are inhibited, the main contactor, if available, is
opened.
Bit 27: Slave/master drive command (H "Slave drive")/(L "Master drive")
Condition HIGH signal, P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) = 3, 4 (closed-

loop frequency/speed control), and the drive inverter pulses are
enabled.
Result ♦ Slave drive: The closed-loop control acts as closed-loop torque
control (M closed-loop control). With f closed-loop control, precise
torque control is not possible until from about 10 % of motor rated
speed onwards.
Condition LOW signal, P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) = 3, 4 (closed-
loop frequency/speed control), and the drive converter inverter pulses
are enabled.
Result ♦ Master drive: The closed-loop control operates as closed-loop
speed or frequency control (closed-loop frequency/speed control).
Bit 28: Command, external alarm 1 (L "External alarm 1")

Result ♦ The operating status is maintained. An alarm message is issued
(A015).
Bit 29: Command, external alarm 2 (L "External alarm 2")

Result ♦ The operating status is maintained. An alarm message is issued
(A016).
Bit 30: Select, BICO data sets (H "data set 2") / (L "data set 1")

Result ♦ The parameter settings of data set 2 for all binector and connector
commands and signals, are activated.
Result ♦ The parameter settings of data set 1 for all binector and connector
commands and signals, are activated.
Bit 31: Main contactor checkback signal command (H "main contactor checkback
signal")
Condition HIGH signal, corresponding to the wiring and parameterization of the

main contactor (option). The checkback time can be set in P600.
Result ♦ Checkback signal, "main contactor energized" (closed).
Display of r550 on PMU
n959.25 = 4
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
07.2005
Control word 1
Siemens AG
r550
Control word 1 •
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit No. Meaning K0030
Src ON/OFF1 P554.B (5/22) 0=OFF1, Shutdown via ramp-function generator, to sequence control 1)
Src1 OFF2(coast) P555.B (1/20)
B Bit 0 followed by pulse disable, to braking control [470.1]
B
1=ON, operating condition (edge-controlled) to setpoint processing [300.5]
Src2 OFF2(coast) P556.B (1/1) 0=OFF2, pulse disable, motor coasts down to sequence control 1)
Bit 1
B 1=Operating condition to braking control [470.1]
Src3 OFF2(coast) P557.B (1/1) 0=OFF3, quick stop to sequence control 1)
6SE7087-6KN60
B
& Bit 2
1=Operating condition to braking control [470.1]
to setpoint processing [318.3], [328.3]
Src InvRelease P561.B (1/1)
1=Inverter enable, pulse enable
"Safe STOP" checkback B Bit 3 to sequence control 1)
0=Pulse disable
Src RampGen Rel P562.B (1/1)
Src1 OFF3(QStop) P558.B (1/1) 1=Ramp-function generator enable
B Bit 4 to setpoint processing [317.6], [327.6]
B 0=Set ramp-function generator to 0
Src2 OFF3(QStop) P559.B (1/1) Src RampGen Stop P563.B (1/1) 1=Start ramp-function generator
B 0=Stop ramp-function generator
& Src Setp Release P564.B (1/1)
Src3 OFF3(QStop) P560.B (1/1) 1=Setpoint enable
B 0=Setpoint disable
Src1 Fault Reset P565.B(2107)

Bit 7 0 =>1 Edge fault acknowledgement to sequence control 1)
B
Src Inching Bit0 P568.B (0/0) to sequence control 1)
Src2 Fault Reset P566.B (0/0) to setpoint processing
B Bit 8 1=Inching bit0
B [316.1], [318.2], [326.1], [328.2]
Src Inching Bit1 P569.B (0/0) to sequence control 1)
Src3 Fault Reset P567.B (0/18) 1 B Bit 9 1=Inching bit1 to setpoint processing
B
[316.1], [318.2], [326.1], [328.2]
1=Control requested Note:This bit must be set in the first PZD word of the
from PMU [50.7] Bit 10 telegram received from serial interfaces, so that the
0=No control requested converter will accept the process data as being valid
Src FWD Speed P571.B (1/1) (compare USS, PROFIBUS, etc.)
1=Clockwise phase sequence enable
0=Clockwise phase sequence disable
Src REV Speed P572.B (1/1)
1=Counter-clockwise phase sequence
enable 0=Counter-clockwise phase sequence disable
1) The sequence control is the internal Src MOP UP P573.B (8/0)
control (software) for realizing the B Bit 13 1=Raise mot. potentiometer to setpoint processing [300.1]
drive status (r001)
Src MOP DOWN P574.B (9/0)
B Bit 14 1=Lower mot. potentiometer to setpoint processing [300.1]
Pre-assignment of the BICO parameters:
1. Binector valid for BICO data set 1 Src No ExtFault1 P575.B (1/1)
2. Binector valid for BICO data set 2 0=External fault 1 to sequence control 1)
B Bit 15
1=No external fault to fault processing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control word 1 Function diagram
10-9
Control word and status word
- 180 -
MASTERDRIVES VC
n959.26 = 4
10-10
Control word 2
r551
Control word 2
Bit No. Meaning K0031
Display of r551 on the PMU
Src FuncDSetBit0 P576.B (0/0) 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
B Bit 16 Select fixed setpoint bit 0 to data sets [540.4]
Src FuncDSetBit1 P577.B (0/0)

B Bit 17 Select fixed setpoint bit 1 to data sets [540.4] •
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
Src MotDSet Bit0 P578.B (0/0)

B Bit 18 Select motor data set bit 0 to data sets [540.4]
Src MotDSet Bit1 P579.B (0/0)

B Bit 19 Select motor data set bit 1 to data sets [540.4]
Src FixSetp Bit0 P580.B (0/16)

B Bit 20 Select fixed setpoint bit 0 to fixed setpoints [290.6]
Src FixSetp Bit1 P581.B (0/0)

B Bit 21 Select fixed setpoint bit 1 to fixed setpoints [290.6]
Src Sync Release P582.B(5002)

1= Enable synchronizing
B Bit 22 to synchronization [X02]
0=Synchronizing disabled
Src Fly Release P583.B (0/0)
1=Enable flying restart
B Bit 23 to sequence control 1)
0=Flying restart disabled
Src Droop Rel P584.B (0/0)
1=Enable droop, speed controller
B Bit 24 to speed control [365.7], [367.4]
0=Droop, speed controller disabled No.n-Reg Rel
Src n-Reg Rel P585.B (1/1) 1 B0099
1=Enable speed controller
B Bit 25 to speed control [360.5], [361.5]
0=Speed controller disabled
Src No ExtFault2 P586.B (1/1)
0=External fault 2 to sequence control 1)
B Bit 26
1=No external fault 2 to fault processing
Src Master/Slave P587.B (0/0) Separate function diagrams are available for
0=Master drive (speed control) to speed control
B Bit 27 master and slave drive control!
1=Slave drive (torque control) to fixed setpoints
Src No Ext Warn1 P588.B (1/1) 1) The sequence control is the internal
0=External alarm 1 to sequence control 1)
B Bit 28 control (software) for realizing the
1=No external alarm 1 to alarm processing
drive status (r001).
Src No Ext Warn2 P589.B (1/1)
0=External alarm 2 to sequence control 1)
B Bit 29
1=No external alarm 2 to alarm processing Pre-assignment of the BICO parameters:
Src BICO DSet P590.B (14) 1. Binector valid for BICO data set 1
0=Select BICO data set 1 2. Binector valid for BICO data set 2
B Bit 30 to data sets [540.4]
1=Select BIC data set 2
Src ContactorMsg P591.B (0/0)
0=No checkback, waiting time P600 active
B Bit 31 to sequence control 1)
1=Checkback main contactor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control word 2 Function diagram
07.2005
- 190 -
MASTERDRIVES VC
10.2 Description of the status word bits

Bit 0: Message, "Ready to power-up" (H)
HIGH signal POWER-ON INHIBIT (008) or READY TO POWER-UP (009) status

Significance ♦ The power supply, the open- and closed-loop control are
operational.
♦ The inverter pulses are inhibited.
♦ If an external power supply and a main contactor (option)/bypass
contactor are available, it is possible to bring the DC link into a no-
voltage condition, when the drive converter is in this status!
Bit 1: Message, "Ready" (H)
HIGH signal PRE-CHARGING (010) or READY (011) status

Significance ♦ The power supply, the open-loop and the closed-loop control are
operational.
♦ The unit is powered-up.
♦ Pre-charging has been completed.
♦ The DC link has been ramped-up to the full voltage.
♦ The inverter pulses are still inhibited.
Bit 2: Message, "Run" (H)
HIGH signal GROUND-FAULT TEST (012), RESTART-ON-THE-FLY (013), RUN

(014), OFF1 (015) or OFF3 (016)
Significance ♦ The unit is functioning.
♦ The inverter pulses are enabled.
♦ The output terminals are live.
Bit 3: Message "Fault" (H)
HIGH signal Fault (007) status

Significance ♦ A fault has occurred.
Bit 4: Message "OFF2" (L)
LOW signal OFF2 command available

Significance ♦ The OFF2 command was output (control word bit 1).
Bit 5: Message "OFF3" (L)
LOW signal OFF3 (016) status, and/or OFF3 command available

Significance ♦ The OFF3 command was output (control word bit 2).
Bit 6: Message "Power-on inhibit" (H)
HIGH signal POWER-ON INHIBIT (008) status

Significance ♦ The power supply, open-loop and closed-loop control are
operational.
♦ If an external power supply and a main contactor (option)/bypass
contactor are available, it is possible to bring the DC link voltage in
this drive converter status into a no-voltage condition!
♦ The message is available as long as an OFF2 command is present
via control word bit 1 or an OFF3 command is available via control
word bit 2 after the setpoint has been ramped-down, or an ON
command is available via control word bit 0 (edge evaluation).
Bit 7: Message, "Alarm" (H)
HIGH signal Alarm (Axxx)

Significance ♦ An alarm has been issued.
♦ The signal is present until the cause has been resolved.
Bit 8: Message "Setpoint-actual value deviation" (L)
LOW signal Alarm, "Setpoint-actual value deviation“ (A034)

Significance ♦ The frequency actual value deviates from the frequency setpoint
(reference value, by a value which exceeds P794 (setpoint-actual
value deviation, frequency), for a time which is longer than P792
(setpoint-actual value deviation time).
♦ The bit is again set as H signal, if the deviation is less than
parameter value P792.
Bit 9: Message "PZD control requested" (H)
HIGH signal Still present.
Bit 10: Message, "Comparison frequency reached" (H)
HIGH signal The parameterized comparison frequency has been reached.

Significance ♦ The absolute frequency actual value is greater than or equal to the
parameterized comparison frequency (P796).
♦ The bit is again set to L signal, as soon as the absolute value of the
comparison frequency (P796), minus the parameterized comparison
frequency hysteresis (P797 as %, referred to the comparison
frequency (P796)) is fallen below.
Bit 11: Message "Undervoltage" (H)
HIGH signal "Undervoltage in the DC link"

Significance ♦ The DC link voltage has fallen below the permissible limit value.
From drive status (°011) fault message (F008) "DC link
undervoltage" is additionally output.
Refer to the Section "Fault- and alarm messages"
Bit 12: Message "Main contactor energized" (H)
HIGH signal The main contactor (AC unit)/precharging contactor (DC unit) (option) is
operated.
Significance ♦ The main contactor/precharging contactor (option) can be driven
with the appropriate wiring and parameterization.
Bit 13: Message "RFG active" (H)
HIGH signal Ramp-function generator active

Significance ♦ The ramp-function generator output (r480 / KK0073) is not equal to
the ramp-function generator input (r460 / KK0072).
A hysteresis, which can be parameterized (P476 as %, referred to
the rated system frequency P352), can only be taken into account
for an analog setpoint input.
♦ When the "synchronizing“ function is selected, alarm A069 is
initiated, as long as the ramp-function generator is active in the
setpoint channel of the synchronizing converter.
The synchronizing operation is not started as long as the ramp-
function generator is active.
Bit 14: Message, "Clockwise rotating field" (H)/ "Counter-clockwise rotating field" (L)
HIGH signal Clockwise rotating field

Significance ♦ The frequency setpoint for the closed-loop control (speed/frequency
setpoint, r482 / KK0075) is greater than or equal to 0.
LOW signal Counter-clockwise rotating field
Significance ♦ The frequency setpoint for the closed-loop control (speed/frequency
setpoint, r482 / KK0075) is less than 0.
Bit 15: Message "KIP/FLN active" (H)
HIGH signal The kinetic buffering (KIP) function or flexible response (FLN) is active.
Significance ♦ KIP: A brief power failure is bypassed using the kinetic energy of
the connected load.
♦ FLN: The converter can be operated up to a minimum DC link
voltage of 50 % of the rated value.
Bit 16: Message "Restart-on-the-fly active" (H)
HIGH signal The restart-on-the-fly function is active, or the excitation time (P602) is
running.
Significance ♦ The drive converter is switched to a motor which is still rotating.
♦ Overcurrent is prevented as a result of the restart-on-the-fly
function.
♦ The excitation time (magnetization time) is active.
Bit 17: Message "Synchronism has been reached" (H)
HIGH signal Synchronism has been reached.

Significance ♦ Synchronism has been reached.
Prerequisite TSY (option) available and P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) =
2 (V/f characteristic for textile applications) or P100 = 1, 2, 3 at line
synchronism (P534 = 2).
Bit 18: Message "Overspeed" (L)
LOW signal Alarm "Overspeed" (A033)

Significance ♦ The frequency actual value is either:
♦ greater than the maximum frequency for the clockwise rotating field
(P452) plus a hysteresis (P804 as %, referred to P452) or
♦ less than the maximum frequency for the counter-clockwise rotating
field (P453) plus a hysteresis (P804 as %, referred to P453).
♦ The bit is again set to an H signal as soon as the absolute value of
the frequency actual value is less than or equal to the absolute
value of the appropriate maximum frequency.
Bit 19: Message “External fault 1“ (H)
HIGH signal "External fault 1"

Significance ♦ A "External fault 1" is present in control word, bit 15.
Output at the terminal strip (PEU, CUVC, TSY, SCI1/2, EB1, EB2) with L signal.
Bit 20: Message "External fault 2" (H)
HIGH signal "External fault 2"

Significance ♦ A "External fault 2" is present in control word bit 26.
Bit 21: Message "External alarm" (H)
HIGH signal "External alarm"

Significance ♦ An "external alarm 1" is present in control word bit 28, or, "external
alarm 2" in control word bit 29.
Bit 22: Message "Alarm i2t drive converter" (H)
HIGH signal Alarm "i2t alarm, inverter" (A025)

Significance ♦ If the instantaneous load status is maintained, then the drive
converter will be thermally overloaded.
Bit 23: Message "Fault, converter overtemperature" (H)
HIGH signal "Inverter temperature too high" fault (F023)

Significance ♦ The limiting inverter temperature has been exceeded.
Bit 24: Message "Alarm, converter overtemperature" (H)
HIGH signal Alarm, "inverter temperature too high" (A022)

Significance ♦ The inverter temperature threshold to release an alarm has been
exceeded.
Bit 25: Message "Alarm, motor overtemperature" (H)
HIGH signal Alarm “Motor overtemperature“

Significance ♦ it involves an “I2t alarm, motor“ (A029) or an overtemperature alarm
from the KTY (P380 > 1) or PTC thermistor (P380 = 1).
♦ The alarmis initiated either by calculating the motor load (r008 /
K0244) or from the KTY84 sensor (r009 / K0245).
♦ Parameters involved in the calculation:
P380 (mot. temp. alarm), P382 (motor cooling),
P383 (mot. temp.T1), P384 (mot. load limit).
Bit 26: Message "Fault, motor overtemperature" (H)
HIGH signal Fault, "Motor overtemperature"

Significance ♦ It involves an "I2t fault, motor" (F021) or an overtemperature fault,
from KTY (P381 > 1) or PTC thermistor (P381 = 1).
Bit 27: Reserve
Bit 28: Message, "Fault, motor stalled/locked" (H)
HIGH signal Fault, “Motor stalled or blocked“ (F015)

Significance ♦ The drive has either stalled or is locked.
Precondition ♦ Blocking recognition at P100 = 3, 4 f/n control:
setpoint/actual value deviation has occurred (bit 8), torque limit
(B0234) reached, speed < 2 % and time in P805 expired
♦ In the case of M control (P100 = 5) or slave drive (P587), blocking is
not recognized.
Bit 29: Message "Bypass contactor energized" (H)
HIGH signal The bypass contactor is energized after precharging has ended
(applies only to AC units equipped with bypass contactor).
Significance ♦ A bypass contactor (option) can be energized with the appropriate
wiring and parameterization.
Bit 30: Message "Alarm sync. error" (H)
HIGH signal Alarm, "Synchronizing error" (A070)

Significance ♦ After successful synchronization, the phase deviation is greater than
the parameterized tolerance range (P531).
Prerequisite TSY (option) available and P100 (open-loop/closed-loop control type) =
2 (V/f characteristic for textile applications) or P100 = 1, 2, 3 at line
synchronism (P534 = 2).
Bit 31: Message "Pre-charging active" (H)
HIGH signal PRE-CHARGING (010) condition

Significance ♦ Pre-charging is realized after an ON command.
n959.27 = 4
07.2005
Status word 1
r552
Status word 1
Siemens AG
Display of r552 on the PMU
Bit No. Meaning K0032 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
1=Ready to switch on 1 B0101 Not Rdy for ON

from sequence control 1) Bit 0
0=Not ready to switch on B0100 Rdy for ON •
1=Ready for operation (DC link loaded, pulses disabled) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
from sequence control 1) Bit 1 1 B0103 NotRdy for Oper
0=Not ready for operation B0102 Rdy for Oper
1) The sequence control is the internal
1=Run (voltage at output terminals) 1 B0105 Not operating control (software) for realizing the
0=Pulses disabled
6SE7087-6KN60
B0104 Operation drive status (r001).
1=Fault active (pulses disabled) 1 B0107 No fault
0=No fault B0106 Fault
0=OFF2 active 1 B0109 OFF2
1=No OFF2 B0108 No OFF2
0=OFF3 active 1 B0111 OFF3
1=No OFF3 B0110 No OFF3
1=Switch-on inhibit 1 B0113 Not blocked
0=No switch-on inhibit (possible to switch on) B0112
Blocked
1=Warning active 1 B0115 No alarm
from alarm processing Bit 7
0=No warning B0114 Alarm
1=No setpoint/actual value deviation detected 1 B0117 Deviation
from messages [480.7] Bit 8
0=Setpoint/actual value deviation B0116 No Deviation
from sequence control 1) Bit 9 1=PZD control requested (always 1)
1=Comparison value reached 1 B0121 CompV not OK

0=Comparison value not reached B0120 CompV OK
1=Low voltage fault 1 B0123 No Low Voltage
from fault processing Bit 11
0=No low voltge fault B0122 Low Voltage
1=Request to energize main contactor 1 B0125 N.Energ.MCon
0=No request to energize main contactor B0124 Energize MCon
from setpoint processing 1=Ramp-function generator active 1 B0127 RampGen n.act.
Bit 13
[317.8], [327.8] 0=Ramp-function generator not active B0126 RampGen active
1=Positive speed setpoint 1 B0129 Speed Setp REV
0=Negative speed setpoint B0128 Speed Setp FWD
From KIB/FLR control 1=Kinetic buffering/flexible response active 1 B0131 KIB/FLR n.active
Bit 15
[600.8], [605.8] 0=Kinetic buffering/flexible response inactive B0130 KIB/FLR active
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status word 1 Function diagram
10-17
- 200 -
MASTERDRIVES VC
n959.28 = 4
10-18
Status word 2
r553
Status word 2 Display of r553 on the PMU
Bit No. Meaning K0033 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
1=Flying restart or excitation active 1 B0133 Fly/Exc n.act. 2)

0=Flying restart not active or excitation finished B0132 Fly/Exc active •
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
1=Synchronism achieved 1 B0135 Sync n.reached
from synchronization [X01.6] Bit 17
0=Synchronism not achieved B0134 Sync reached
1) The sequence control is the internal

0=Overspeed 1 B0137 No Overspeed
from messages [480.7] Bit 18 control (software) for realizing the
1=No overspeed B0136 Overspeed drive status (r001).
1=External fault 1 active 1 B0139 No Ext Fault 1
0=No external fault 1 B0138 2) in addition
Ext Fault 1
ExcitationEnd
1=External fault 2 active 1 B0141 No Ext Fault 2
from sequence control 1) Bit 20 B0255
0=No external fault 2 B0140 Ext Fault 2
1=External warning active 1 B0143 No Ext Warning
0=No external warning B0142 Ext Warning
1=Converter overload warning active 1 B0145 No OvldWarn Drv
0=No converter overload warning B0144 Ovld Warn Drive
1=Converter overtemperature fault active 1 B0147 No Tmp Flt Drv
0=No converter overtemperature fault B0146 Tmp Flt Drive
1=Converter overtemperature warning active 1 B0149 No TmpWarn Drv
0=No converter overtemperature warning B0148 TmpWarn Drive
1=Motor overtemperature warning active 1 B0151 No TmpWarnMotor
0=No motor overtemperature warning B0150 TmpWarnMotor
1=Motor overtemperature fault active 1 B0153 No TmpFltMotor
O=No motor overtemperature fault B0152
TmpFltMotor
Bit 27 Reserve
from block/pullout 1=Motor pulled out/blocked fault active 1 B0157 No MotorPullOut
Bit 28
diagnosis [485.8] 0=No motor pulled out/blocked fault B0156 Motor PullOut
1=Bypass contactor energized (only AC units) 1 B0159 ChrgRelay open
0=Bypass contactor not energized B0158 ChrgRelay close
1=Fault during synchronization 1 B0161 No Sync Fault
from synchronization [X01.6] Bit 30
0=No fault during synchronization B0160 Sync Fault
1=Pre-charging active 1 B0163 Prechrg n.act.
0=Pre-charging not active B0162
Prechrg active
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Status word 2 Function diagram
07.2005
- 210 -
MASTERDRIVES VC
07.2005 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
DANGER SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES units are operated at high voltages.

All work carried out on or with the equipment must conform to all the
national electrical codes (BGV A2 in Germany).
Maintenance and service work may only be executed by qualified
personnel.
Only spare parts authorized by the manufacturer may be used.
The prescribed maintenance intervals and also the instructions for
repair and replacement must be complied with.
Hazardous voltages are still present in the drive units up to 5 minutes
after the converter has been powered down due to the DC link
capacitors. Thus, the unit or the DC link terminals must not be worked
on until at least after this delay time.
The power terminals and control terminals can still be at hazardous
voltage levels even when the motor is stationary.
If it is absolutely necessary that the drive converter be worked on when
powered-up:
♦ Never touch any live parts.
♦ Only use the appropriate measuring and test equipment and
protective clothing.
♦ Always stand on an ungrounded, isolated and ESD-compatible pad.
If these warnings are not observed, this can result in death, severe
bodily injury or significant material damage.
Maintenance 07.2005
11.1 Replacing the fan

The fan is designed for an operating time of L10 ≥ 35 000 hours at an
ambient temperature of Tu = 40 °C. It should be replaced in good time
to maintain the availability of the unit.
DANGER To replace the fan the converter has to be disconnected from the
supply and removed.
Construction types The fan assembly consists of:

E-G ♦ the fan housing
♦ a fan
The fan assembly is installed between the capacitor battery and the
motor connection.
Replacement ♦ Withdraw connector X20.
♦ Remove the cable fastening.
♦ Undo the two M6x12 Torx screws.
♦ Pull out the fan assembly towards the front.
♦ Install the new fan assembly in reverse sequence.
Prior to start-up, check that the fan can run freely and check for correct
direction of air flow.
The air must be blown upwards out of the unit.
Torx M6x12 Torx M6x12
Fan Fan housing
Fig. 11-1 Fan assembly
07.2005 Maintenance
Construction types The fan assembly consists of:

J-Q ♦ the fan housing
♦ one or two fans
♦ the starting capacitors
The fan assembly is installed at the top in the chassis.
♦ Withdraw connector X20.
♦ Unscrew the two M8 screws of the fan assembly.
♦ In the case of type K with only one fan, you must dismantle the
support plate below the fan (2 x M8).
♦ Pull out the fan assembly towards the front (if necessary, tilt it
slightly down at the front) and lay it down securely.
CAUTION The fan assembly weighs up to 52 kg, depending on its design.
♦ Undo the cable fastenings and fan connections.

♦ Take the fan support plate out of the fan assembly and remove the
fan from the support plate.
♦ Install the new fan assembly in the reverse sequence.
For type K and L: Renew contact washers for grounding.
Prior to start-up, check that the fan can run freely and check for correct
direction of air flow.
The air must be blown upwards out of the unit.
11.2 Replacing the fan fuses (types J to Q)

The fuses are in a fuse holder which is mounted on a DIN rail in the
bottom of the unit. The fuse holder has to be opened to replace the
fuses.
11.3 Replacing the starting capacitor

The starting capacitor is
♦ next to the fan connection (types E - G)
♦ on or inside the fan assembly (types J - Q).
♦ Withdraw the plug connections on the starting capacitor.
♦ Unscrew the starting capacitor.
♦ Install the new starting capacitor in reverse sequence (4.5 Nm).
Maintenance 07.2005
11.4 Replacing the capacitor battery

The unit is an assembly which consists of the DC link capacitors, the
capacitor support and the DC link bus module.
Construction types ♦ Disconnect the electrical connection to the inverter bus module.
E and F ♦ Undo the mechanical interlock.
♦ Swing the capacitor battery out towards the front and lift the unit out
towards the top.
Construction type G ♦ Remove the connection for the balancing resistor (cable lug M6).
♦ Detach the mechanical fastening.
♦ Swing the capacitor battery out towards the front and lift the unit at
an angle of 45 ° out of the converter.
Construction types The capacitor battery consists of three units. Each unit contains a
J-Q capacitor support and a DC link bus module.
♦ Detach the plug-in connections.
♦ Detach the mechanical fastening (three screws: two on the left, one
on the right)
Tilt the capacitor battery sideways until its endstop, slightly raise the
unit and lift it forwards out of the converter.
CAUTION The capacitor battery weighs up to 30 kg, depending on the converter

output!
11.5 Replacing the SML and the SMU

SML: Snubber Module Lower
SMU: Snubber Module Upper
♦ Remove the capacitor battery.
♦ Undo the fixing screws (4 x M8, 8 - 10 Nm or 4 x M6, 2.5 - 5 Nm,
1 x M4, max 1.8 Nm).
♦ Remove the modules.
Install the new modules in the reverse sequence.
07.2005 Forming
12 Forming
CAUTION If a unit has been non-operational for more than one year, the DC link
capacitors have to be newly formed. If this is not carried out, the unit
can be damaged when the line voltage is powered up.
If the unit was started-up within one year after having been
manufactured, the DC link capacitors do not have to be re-formed. The
date of manufacture of the unit can be read from the serial number.
How the serial (Example: A-N60147512345)
number is made up
Digit Example Meaning
1 and 2 A- Place of manufacture
3 N 2001
P 2002
R 2003
S 2004
T 2005
U 2006
V 2007
W 2008
4 1 to 9 January to September
O October
N November
D December
5 to 14 Not relevant for forming
The following applies for the above example:

Manufacture took place in June 2001.
During forming, the DC link of the unit is connected up via a rectifier, a
smoothing capacitor and a resistor.
During forming a defined voltage and a limited current are applied to
the DC link capacitors and the internal conditions necessary for the
function of the DC link capacitors are restored again.
Forming 07.2005
Motor-
connection
3AC R
U2/T1
C / L+ V2/T2
A C
D / L- W2/T3
Forming
DC link Inverter
PE1 PE2
Fig. 12-1 Forming circuit
Components for the Types E - G:

forming circuit
Vrated A R C
(suggestion)
DC 270 V to 310 V SKD 50 / 12 220 Ω / 100 W 22 nF / 1600 V
DC 510 V to 650 V SKD 62 / 16 330 Ω / 150 W 22 nF / 1600 V
DC 675 V to 810 V 3 x SKKD 81 / 22 470 Ω / 200 W 22 nF / 1600 V
Types J - K:
Vrated A R C
DC 510 V to 650 V SKD 62 / 16 100 Ω / 500 W 22 nF / 1600 V
Type L:
The capacitors of type L do not require forming.
Type M, Q + R:
The inverters of each inverter unit must be formed individually in the
case of type M, Q and R (as for type K).
DANGER The unit has hazardous voltage levels up to 5 minutes after it has been
powered down due to the DC link capacitors. The unit or the DC link
terminals must not be worked on until at least after this delay time.
Procedure ♦ Before you form the DC link capacitors, all DC link connections must
be disconnected.
♦ The converter incoming power supply must be switched off.
♦ The unit is not permitted to receive a switch-on command (e.g. via
the keyboard of the PMU or the terminal strip).
♦ Connect the required components in accordance with the circuit
example.
♦ Energize the forming circuit. The duration of forming is approx. 1
hour.
05.2006 Technical Data
13 Technical Data
EU low-voltage directive EN 50178
73/23/EEC and RL93/68/EEC
EU directive EMC 89/336/EEC EN 61800-3
EU machine directive 89/392/EEC EN 60204-1
Approval UL: E 145 153
CSA: LR 21 927
Type of cooling Air cooling with built-in fan
Permissible ambient and cooling-
medium temperature
• during operation 0° C to +40° C ( 32° F to 104° F)
(up to 50° C see Fig. "Derating curves")
• during storage -25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
• during transport -25° C to +70° C (-13° F to 158° F)
Installation height ≤ 1000 m above sea level (100 % load capability)
> 1000 m to 3500 m above sea level
(for load capability. see Fig. "Derating curves")
Permissible humidity rating Relative humidity ≤ 95 % during transport and storage
≤ 85 % during operation (moisture
condensation not permissible)
Climatic class Class 3K3 to DIN IEC 721-3-3 (during operation)
Pollution degree Pollution degree 2 to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110. Part 1).
Moisture condensation during operation is not permissible
Overvoltage category Category III to IEC 664-1 (DIN VDE 0110. Part 2)
Degree of protection EN 60529
• Standard • IP00
• Option • IP20 (Option for types E to G)
Class of protection Class 1 to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106. Part 1)
Shock protection to EN 60204-1 and DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 (BGV A2)
Radio interference suppression to EN 61800-3
• Standard No radio interference suppression
• Options Radio interference suppression filter for Class A1 to EN 55011
Interference immunity Industrial to EN 61800-3
Paint finish For interior installation
Mechanical specifications
- Vibrations To DIN IEC 68-2-6
During stationary use:
Constant amplitude
• of deflection 0.075 mm in the frequency range 10 Hz to 58 Hz
• of acceleration 9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 58 Hz to 500 Hz
During transport:
• of deflection 3.5 mm in the frequency range 5 Hz to 9 Hz
• of acceleration 9.8 m/s² in the frequency range > 9 Hz to 500 Hz
- Shocks to DIN IEC 68-2-27 / 08.89
(only E, F, and G types of 30 g. 16 ms half-sine shock
construction)
Miscellaneous The devices are ground-fault protected, short-circuit-proof and idling-
proof on the motor side
Table 13-1 General data
Technical Data 05.2006
Permissible rated current in %

100
75
50
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
25
0
0 2,5 3 5 6 7,5 9 12 15 16
Pulse frequency in kHz

Permissible rated output voltage in % <1>
acc. to VDE 0110 / IEC 664-1 The derating curve only applies to the following units:
(not necessary acc. to UL / CSA) - Sizes E to G with rated input voltage of
100 <2> 510 - 650 V only in the case of an actual input
<1> voltage of 510 - 540 V
- Sizes J to Q with a rated input voltage
of 675 - 810 V
<2>
75
The derating curve only applies for the following units:
of 510 - 650 V
of 675 - 810 V only in the case of an actual input
50 voltage of 675 V
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Installation altitude above sea level in m

100
Temp Derating
[°C] factor K2
75
50 0,76
45 0,879
50
40 1,0
25 35 1,125 * * See
30 1,25 * the
following
0 25 1,375 * Note
0 10 20 30 40 50
Cooling-medium temp. in °C
100
Altitude Derating
[m] factor K1
90
1000 1,0
80 2000 0,9
3000 0,845
70
4000 0,8
60
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Installation altitude above sea level in m
Fig. 13-1 Derating curves
The derating of the permissible rated current for installation altitudes of

over 1000 m and at ambient temperatures below 40 °C is calculated as
follows:
Total derating = Deratingaltitude x Deratingambient temperature
K = K1 x K2
NOTE It must be borne in mind that total derating must not be greater than 1!
Example: Altitude: 3000 m K1 = 0.845
Ambient temperature: 35 °C K2 = 1.125
→ Total derating = 0.845 x 1.125 = 0.95
Rating plate
Unit designation
List of unit options
Year of manufacture
Month of manufacture
Fig. 13-2 Rating plate
Meaning of the
option codes
Option Meaning Option Meaning

CBP: Profibus EB1: Expansion Board 1
G11 Slot A G61 Slot A
G13 Slot C G63 Slot C
G14 Slot D G64 Slot D
G15 Slot E G65 Slot E
G16 Slot F G66 Slot F
G17 Slot G G67 Slot G
CBP2: PROFIBUS (sync freq EB2: Expansion Board 2
possible) G71 Slot A
G91 Slot A G73 Slot C
G93 Slot C G74 Slot D
G95 Slot E G75 Slot E
G97 Slot G G76 Slot F
The CBP2 module takes the place of G77 Slot G
the CB. LBA backplane bus adapter
CBC: CAN-Bus K11 installed in the electronics box
G21 Slot A
G23 Slot C ADB adapter board
G24 Slot D
G25 Slot E K01 Mounting pos. 2 (slot D, E)
G26 Slot F K02 Mounting pos. 3 (slot F, G)
G27 Slot G
SLB: SIMOLINK
G41 Slot A
G43 Slot C
G44 Slot D
G45 Slot E
G46 Slot F
G47 Slot G
Table 13-2 Meaning of the option codes
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 31-0RE60 31-3RE60 31-6RE60 32-0RE60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 270 (-15 %) to 310 (+15 %)
• Output 3 AC 0 up to rated DC voltage x 0.75
Rated frequency [Hz]
• Input ---
• Output: V/f = constant 0 to 500
V = constant 8 to 300
Rated current [A]
• Input 119 156 193 240
• Output 100 131 162 202
DC link voltage [V] = Rated DC voltage
Rated output [kVA] 35 to 40 45 to 52 56 to 65 70 to 80
Auxiliary current supply [V] DC 24 (20 - 30)
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A] 1.7
Standard version at 20 V
Maximum version at 20 V
Auxiliary current supply fan [V] 1 AC or 2 AC 230 ± 15 %
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A] 0.43
Pulse frequency [kHz] 1.7 to 9 1.7 to 9 1.7 to 9 1.7 to 9
Derating curve (s. Fig. 13-1) d d d d
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1
Base load current [A] 0.91 x rated output current
Base load duration [s] 240
Overload current [A] 1.36 x rated output current
Overload duration [s] 60
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1 (addtional)
Losses, cooling, power factor
Power factor conv. cosϕU < 0.92 ind.
Efficiency η (rated operation) 0.97 0.98 0.97 0.98
Power loss (at 2.5 kHz) [kW] 0.90 1.10 1.45 1.50
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s] 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10
Sound pressure levels, types of construction, dimensions, weights
Sound pressure level 69 69 69 69
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction E E E E
Dimensions [mm]
• Width 270 270 270 270
• Height 1050 1050 1050 1050
• Depth 350 350 350 350
Weight approx. [kg] 55 55 55 55
Table 13-3 Air-cooled inverter (part 1)
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 31-0TE60 31-2TF60 31-5TF60 31-8TF60 32-1TG60 32-6TG60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 510 (-15 %) to 650 (+10 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 110 148 174 221 250 305
• Output 92 124 146 186 210 260
Rated output [kVA] 61 to 76 82 to 103 97 to 121 123 to 154 139 to 174 172 to 216
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A] 1.7 2.1 2.3
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A] 0.43 0.80 0.95
Pulse frequency [kHz] 1.7 to 16 1.7 to 16 1.7 to 9 1.7 to 9 1.7 to 7.5 1.7 to 7.5
Derating curve (see Fig. 13-1) c c d d e e
Load class II to EN 60 146-1-1 (additional)
Power factor conv. cosϕC < 0.92 ind.
Efficiency η (rated operation) ≥ 0.98
Power loss (at 2.5 kHz) [kW] 1.05 1.35 1.56 1.70 2.18 2.75
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s] 0.10 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.31 0.31
Sound pressure level 69 69 69 69 80 80
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction E F F F G G
Dimensions [mm]
• Width 270 360 360 360 508 508
• Height 1050 1050 1050 1050 1450 1450
• Depth 350 350 350 350 450 450
Weight approx. [kg] 55 65 65 65 155 155
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 33-2TG60 33-7TG60 35-1TJ60 36-0TJ60 37-0TJ60 37-0TK60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 510 (-15 %) to 650 (+10 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 375 440 607 702 821 821
• Output 315 370 510 590 690 690
DC link voltage [V] = rated DC voltage
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A] 2.3 3.0
Derating curve (see Fig. 13-1) f f f g i i
Base load current [A] 0.91 x output current not additional
Base load duration [s] 270 not additional
Overload current [A] 1.6 x output current not additional
Overload duration [s] 30 not additional
Power factor conv. CosϕC < 0.92 ind.
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction G G J J J K
Dimensions [mm]
• Width 508 508 800 800 800 800
• Height 1450 1450 1400 1400 1400 1750
• Depth 450 450 551 551 551 551
Weight approx. [kg] 155 155 250 250 275 500
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 38-6TK60 41-1TK60 41-3TL60 41-6TQ60 41-6TM60 42-1TQ60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 510 (-15 %) to 650 (+10 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 1023 1310 1551 1940 1940 2490
• Output 860 1100 1300 1630 1630 2090
Rated output [kVA] 567 to 714 724 to 914 856 to 1073 to 1073 to 1375 to
1080 1355 1355 1737
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A] 3.0 3.0 3.0 5.2
Standard version at 20 V (Master + Slave)
• Max. aux. curr. requirement[A] 4.2 4.2 4.2 6.6
Maximum version at 20 V (Master + Slave)
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A] 4.5 12.8 9 25.6
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 60 Hz [A] 6.9 22 13.8 44.0
Pulse frequency [kHz] 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5 1.7to 2.5
Derating curve (see Fig. 13-1) i i i i i i
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction K K L Q1) M2) Q1)
Dimensions [mm]
• Width 800 800 1100 (2 x 800) (2x800+508) (2x800)
• Height 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
• Depth 551 551 551 551 551 551
Weight approx. [kg] 520 540 850 1040 1200 1080
1) without interphase transformer chassis
2) with interphase transformer chassis
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 42-5TN60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 510 (-15 %) to 650 (+10 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 2940
• Output 2470
Rated output [kVA] 1626 to
2053
Standard version at 20 V (Master +
Slave)
Maximum version at 20 V (Master +
Slave)
Pulse frequency [kHz] 1.7 to 2.5
Derating curve (see Fig. 13-1) i
Power loss (at 2.5 kHz) [kW] 27.5
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s] 1.84
Sound pressure level 91
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction N1)
Dimensions [mm]
• Width 2x1100
• Height 1750
• Depth 551
Weight approx. [kg] 1700
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 26-1UE60 26-6UE60 28-0UF60 31-1UF60 31-3UG60 31-6UG60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 675 (-15 %) to 810 (+ 10 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 73 79 94 129 152 186
• Output 61 66 79 108 128 156
Pulse frequency [kHz] 1.7 to 16 1.7 to 16 1.7 to 9 1.7 to 7.5 1.7 to 7.5 1.7 to 6
Derating curve (see Fig. 13-1) c c d e e f
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction E E F F G G
Dimensions [mm]
• Width 270 270 360 360 508 508
• Height 1050 1050 1050 1050 1450 1450
• Depth 350 350 350 450 450 450
Weight approx. [kg] 55 55 65 65 155 155
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 32-0UG60 32-3UG60 33-0UJ60 33-5UJ60 34-5UJ60 35-7UK60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 675 (-15 %) to 810 (+ 10 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 228 268 353 421 538 678
• Output 192 225 297 354 452 570
Derating curve (see Fig. 13-1) f f h h i i
Base load current [A] 0.91 x output current not additional
Base load duration [s] 270 not additional
Overload current [A] 1.6 x output current not additional
Overload duration [s] 30 not additional
Efficiency η (rated operation) ≥ 0.98 ≥ 0.97 ≥ 0.98
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction G G J J J K
Dimensions [mm]
• Width 508 508 800 800 800 800
• Height 1450 1450 1400 1400 1400 1750
• Depth 450 450 551 551 551 551
Weight approx. [kg] 155 155 250 250 250 500
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 36-5UK60 38-6UK60 41-1UL60 41-2UL60 41-4UQ60 41-6UQ60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 675 (-15 %) to 810 (+ 10 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 774 1023 1285 1464 1666 1880
• Output 650 860 1080 1230 1400 1580
Pulse frequency [kHz] 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5
Derating curve (see Fig. 13-1) i i i i i i
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction K K L L Q1) Q1)
Dimensions [mm]
• Width 800 800 1100 1100 (2 x 800) (2 x 800)
• Height 1750 1790 1750 1750 1750 1750
• Depth 551 551 551 551 551 551
Weight approx. [kg] 520 520 850 850 1200 1200
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 41-4UM60 41-6UM60 42-1UN60 42-3UN60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 675 (-15 %) to 810 (+ 10 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 1666 1880 2440 2785
• Output 1400 1580 2050 2340
Rated output [kVA] 1213 to 1454 1369 to 1641 1775 to 2130 2026 to 2432
Pulse frequency [kHz] 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5 1.7 to 2.5
Derating curve (see Fig. 13-1) i i i i
Power loss (at 2.5 kHz) [kW] 20.0 23.0 27.0 31.7
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s] 1.76 1.76 1.84 1.84
Sound pressure level 87 87 91 91
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction M2) M2) N1) N1)
Dimensions [mm]
• Width (2x800+508) (2x800+508) (2x1100) (2x1100)
• Height 1750 1750 1750 1750
• Depth 551 551 551 551
Weight approx. [kg] 1500 1500 1700 1700
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 26-0WF60 28-2WF60 31-0WG60 31-2WG60 31-5WG60 31-7WG60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 890 to 930 (± 15 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 71 98 115 140 173 204
• Output 60 82 97 118 145 171
• Aux. curr. requirem. at 50 Hz [A] 0.80 0.95
Pulse frequency [kHz] 1.7 to 7.5 1.7 to 7.5 1.7 to 7.5 1.7 to 7.5 1.7 to 6 1.7 to 6
Derating curve (see Fig. 13-1) e e e e f f
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction F F G G G G
Dimensions [mm]
• Width 360 360 508 508 508 508
• Height 1050 1050 1450 1450 1450 1450
• Depth 350 350 450 450 450 450
Weight approx. [kg] 65 65 155 155 155 155
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 32-1WG60 33-0WJ60 33-5WJ60 34-5WJ60 35-7WK60 36-5WK60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 890 to 930 (± 15 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 248 353 421 538 678 774
• Output 208 297 354 452 570 650
Pulse frequency [kHz] 1.7 to 6 1.7 to 2.5
Derating curve (see Fig. 13-1) f i
Power factor conv. CosϕC < 0.92 ind.
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction G J J J K K
Dimensions [mm]
• Width 508 800 800 800 800 800
• Height 1450 1400 1400 1400 1750 1750
• Depth 450 551 551 551 551 551
Weight approx. [kg] 250 250 250 250 500 520
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 38-6WK60 41-1WL60 41-2WL60 41-4WQ60 41-6WQ60 41-4WM60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 890 to 930 (± 15 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 1023 1285 1464 1666 1880 1666
• Output 860 1080 1230 1400 1580 1400
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction K L L Q1) Q1) M2)
Dimensions [mm]
• Width 800 1100 1100 (2 x 800) (2 x 800) (2x800+508)
• Height 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750 1750
• Depth 551 551 551 551 551 551
Weight approx. [kg] 520 850 850 1200 1200 1500
Designation Value
Order No. 6SE70... 41-6WM60 42-1WN60 42-3WN60
Rated voltage [V]
• Input DC 890 to 930 (± 15 %)
• Input ---
Rated current [A]
• Input 1880 2440 2785
• Output 1580 2050 2340
Rated output [kVA] 1807 to 1888 2343 to 2450 2675 to 2797
Maximum version at 20 V (Master+Sl.) (Master + Slave)
Power loss (at 2.5 kHz) [kW] 26.50 32.70 43.50
Cooling-air requirement [m³/s] 1.76 1.84 1.84
Sound pressure level 87 91 91
IP00 [dB(A)]
Type of construction M2) N1) N1)
Dimensions [mm]
• Width (2x800+508) (2x1100) (2x1100)
• Height 1750 1750 1750
• Depth 551 551 551
Weight approx. [kg] 1500 1700 1700
Water-cooled
inverter
Order No. Power loss Cooling Maximum Typical pressure drop
(at 2.5 kHz) water additional heat according to
requirement *) dissipation at Tair volumetric flow
[kW] [l/min] ≤ 30 °C [kW]
Rated input voltage DC 510 to 650 V
6SE7031-0TE60-1AA1 1.05 7.25 0.7 0.2 bar at 7.3 l/min
6SE7031-2TF60-1AA1 1.35 9.20 0.7 0.2 bar at 11 l/min
6SE7032-1TG60-1AA1 2.18 16.10 1.5 0.2 bar at 25 l/min
6SE7026-1UE60-1AA1 0.75 6.20 0.7 0.2 bar at 7.3 l/min
6SE7026-6UF60-1AA1 0.84 6.65 0.7 0.2 bar at 11 l/min
6SE7031-3UG60-1AA1 1.80 14.00 1.5 0.2 bar at 25 l/min
6SE7026-0WF60-1AA1 0.90 6.75 0.7 0.2 bar at 11 l/min
6SE7028-2WF60-1AA1 1.24 8.40 0.7 0.2 bar at 11 l/min
6SE7031-0WG60-1AA1 1.68 12.45 1.5 0.2 bar at 25 l/min
Table 13-16 Water-cooled inverter
NOTE These units and the air-cooled inverters are identically constructed.
Instead of the heat sink for air, an air/water cooler has been installed.
All the technical data not listed in Table 13-16 for a particular unit are
the same as those of the air-cooled inverter. The first 12 positions of
the Order No. are identical. The supplement "-1AA1” indicates water
cooling.
Refer to the tables in Section 13.1.7 for the data for water-cooled units
of types J to Q.
*) The cooling water requirement applies for the unit rating of the inverter and 100%
utilization of the additional heat dissipation obtained from a water temperature rise
intake/return of ∆T = 5 K.
Cooling, power The following values apply to units:

requirement of fan, 6SE7035-1TJ60, 6SE7036-0TJ60, 6SE7033-0UJ60
sound pressure 6SE7033-5UJ60. 6SE7034-5UJ60, 6SE7033-0WJ60
level 6SE7033-5WJ60, 6SE7034-5WJ60
Fan voltage / frequency [V / Hz] 230 / 50 230 / 60
Fan current-requirement [A] 2.45 3.6
Flow [m3/s] 0.46 0.464
Sound pressure level IP00 [dB(A)] 77 77.5
Sound pressure level chassis in
IP20 - cabinet [dB(A)] 70.5 71.5
IP42 - cabinet with dust filter,
400 mm high cabinet cover [dB(A)] 70.5 71
The following values apply to units:

6SE7037-0TJ60, 6SE7037-0TK60, 6SE7038-6TK60,
6SE7035-7UK60, 6SE7036-5UK60, 6SE7035-7WK60,
6SE7036-5WJ60
Fan current-requirement [A] 5.0 7.4
Flow [m3/s] 0.6 0.6
Sound pressure level IP00 [dB(A)] 80 82
IP20 - cabinet [dB(A)] 76 77
400 mm high cabinet cover [dB(A)] 74 75

6SE7041-1TK60, 6SE7038-6UK60, 6SE7038-6WK60
Fan current-requirement [A] 12.8 22
Flow [m3/s] 0.88 0.88
Sound pressure level IP00 [dB(A)] 82 86
IP20 - cabinet [dB(A)] 82 85
400 mm high cabinet cover [dB(A)] 81 84

6SE7041-3TL60, 6SE7041-1UL60, 6SE7041-2UL60
6SE7041-1WL60, 6SE7041-2WL60
Fan current-requirement [A] 12.8 22
Flow [m3/s] 0.95 1.06
Sound pressure level IP00 [dB(A)] 89.2 91.3
IP20 - cabinet [dB(A)] 84.5 88.5
400 mm high cabinet cover [dB(A)] 84.3 87.2
Condition for sound-pressure measurement:

♦ Room height: 6 m
♦ Distance to nearest reflecting wall: 4 m
NOTE The values for the power requirement and the volumetric flow have to
Type of construction be doubled respectively: the sound pressure level increases by max.
M, N, Q 3 dB(A).
13.1 Notes regarding water-cooled units

Other conditions The unit is to be connected to an existing external cooling-water circuit.
affecting operation The construction of this cooling-water circuit under the aspects of
♦ open or closed circuit
♦ choice and juxtaposition of materials
♦ composition of cooling water
♦ cooling-water cooling (recooling, supply of fresh cooling water)
♦ and others
have an important effect on the safe functioning and service life of the
whole installation.
WARNING The warnings given under “Standard units" apply.

Installation and servicing work on the water cooling system must be
performed with the power disconnected.
There must be no condensation on the units (also applies to standard

units).
13.1.1 Notes regarding installation and components

A closed-circuit water-cooling system of stainless steel with water/water
heat exchanger is recommended for the converters.
To prevent electrochemical corrosion and transfer of vibration,
SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES are to be connected to water supply
and return lines by flexible, electrically non-conducting hose. The
hose length (in total) should be > 1.5 m.
If plastic piping is used in the installation, this hose is not necessary.
The water hoses should be connected up before the converter is
installed.
If hose clips are used, they should be checked for tightness at three-
monthly intervals.
Filling Safety
1 bar/ valve
2.5 bar < 1 bar /
< 2.5 bar
System
1 1/4" Control cubicle
Pump
FU1 FUn
Diaphragm expansion
Primary circuit tank
Automatic
venting
Filter
V/E flow monitor

Thermostatic controller
Fig. 13-3 Water-to-water heat exchanger
Water-water heat If a water supply system is already available in the plant which does not
exchangers exceed temperatures above 35 °C but does not fulfil the cooling water
requirements, the two cooling systems can be connected using a water-
water heat exchanger.
The coolers of the frequency converters are connected via a manifold
so that the necessary flow rate is ensured but the pressure does not
exceed the permitted value. Factors such as height differences and
distances must be taken into account.
For devices without anti-freeze, we recommend using VARIDOSTOP
available from Schilling Chemie. VARIDOSTOP is an organic corrosion
inhibitor specially developed for semi-open and closed cooling systems.
It protects metals against corrosion by forming a protective organic film
on the surface of the metal.
The operating pressure is to be adjusted according to the flow

conditions in the supply and return sides of the water cooling system.
The volume of cooling water per unit time is to be set to within the
values given in Tables 13-19 to 13-21.
This can be done, for example, by means of valves with flowmeter
(e.g. as made by “OSTACO Armaturen AG”, CH-8902 Urdorf,
Tel. ++4117355555).
th
The flowmeters made by GPI (5252 East 36 Street North Wichita,
KS USA 67220-3205 Tel.: 316-686-7361 Fax.: 316-686-6746) have
also proved very effective.
The user must take measures to ensure that the max. permissible
operating pressure is not exceeded. Use must be made of a pressure
regulating device.
Closed-circuit cooling systems are to be provided with pressure
balancing devices with safety valve *) and air venting devices.
When the system is filled for the first time, the heat sinks have to be
vented (see Section 13.1.7 "Start-up").
Units larger than or equal to type J have a vent valve for this purpose.
On type E to G units there are no vent valves. Venting has to take place
externally via the free tap (see Fig. 13-3).
To ensure that the necessary volume keeps flowing, flushback filters
should be fitted instead of the normal pipe strainer. Flushback filters
automatically take care of the return flow.
These are manufactured by, for example, Benckiser GmbH,
Industriestrasse 7, D-69198 Schriesheim Tel.: +49-6203-730.
ASI 1 Information Bulletin E20125-C6038-J702-A1-7400 of February
1997 contains information about suggested plant configurations for
various applications.
Water piping must be laid with extreme care. The pipes must be
properly secured mechanically and checked for leakage.
Water pipes must under no circumstances make contact with live parts
(insulation clearance: at least 13 mm).
*) ≤ 1.2 bar at a permissible operating pressure of 1.0 bar, or ≤ 3 bar at a permissible

operating pressure of 2.5 bar
13.1.2 Application
In application, the same general conditions apply as to standard units
(with air cooling), with the exception of the cooling conditions described
below.
Water is normally used as the cooling medium (see Section "Coolant").
Antifreeze is added only in exceptional cases.
Within a cooling water temperature range of from + 5 °C to + 38 °C, the
unit can be operated at 100% rated current.
If higher cooling water temperatures are necessary, the unit operating
current must be reduced as shown in Fig. 13-4 and Fig. 13-5 (Curve 1).
This applies only where water is used as the cooling medim (see notes
in Section "Anti-condensation, Antifreeze").
Permissible rated current in % Derating Curve IP22

105
100
95
1
90
85
80
75
70
65
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Supply temperature in °C
Water
20 % Mixture -10 °C
Fig. 13-4 Reduction curve applying to installation in IP22 cabinets
Permissible rated current in % Derating Curve Water IP54

105
100
95
1
90
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Supply temperature in °C
Water
Fig. 13-5 Reduction curve 2 applying to installation in IP54 cabinets
NOTE The maximum coolant temperature is 50 °C for IP22 cubicles and

46 °C for IP54 cubicles!
13.1.3 Coolant
Normal service water or a water-antifreeze mixture (see Section
"Antifreeze additive") can be used as coolant.
13.1.3.1 Definition of cooling water
The cooling water must meet the following requirements in the long
term:
Max. grain size of any entrained particles ≤ 0.1 mm
pH value 6.0 to 8.0
Chloride < 40 ppm
Sulfate < 50 ppm
Dissolved substances < 340 ppm
Total hardness < 170 ppm
Conductivity (water only, also see Section < 500 µS/cm
"Antifreeze additive")
Cooling water inlet temperature + 5 ... 38 °C
Cooling water temperature rise per unit (rated ∆ T ≈ 5 °C
operation)
Operating pressure
• Type of construction E to G ≤ 1,0 bar
• Type of construction ≥ J ≤ 2,5 bar
NOTICE No operating pressures higher than 1.0 bar, or 2.5 bar (≥ type of
construction J) are permitted!
If the system is operating at a higher pressure, the supply pressure
must be reduced to 2.5 bar at each unit.
The heat sink material is not seawater-proof, i.e. it must not be cooled
directly with seawater!
Filters (sieves) with a mesh size of < 100 µm are to be fitted in the unit
water
systems (see Section “Notes regarding installation and components”)!
If there is a risk of freezing, appropriate counter-measures should be
taken for operation, storage and transport, e.g. draining and blowing out
with air, extra heaters, etc.
WARNING The warning notes for "standard units" apply.

Installation and servicing work on the water systems must always be
performed with the electric power disconnected.
13.1.3.2 Antifreeze additive
By the use of antifreeze, the lower operating temperature limit can be

reduced from + 5 °C to 0 °C, and when not operating the system is
protected against freezing at temperatures down to − 30 °C.
Because of its physical properties (heat absorption, thermal
conductivity, viscosity), antifreeze reduces cooling system efficiency. It
should only be used when absolutely necessary.
Reduction curves for antifreeze are given in the Section "Application"
(Figs. 13-4 and 13-5). Without derating, premature aging of unit
components cannot be ruled out. Converter tripping by the
overtemperature protection must also be expected.
WARNING Operation at temperatures of < 0 °C is not permitted, not even with

antifreeze!
Use of other media can shorten the service life.
If less that 20 % Antifrogen N is added to the cooling water, the risk of
corrosion is increased, which can shorten the service life.
If more than 30 % Antifrogen N is added to the cooling water, this will
have an adverse effect on heat dissipation and hence on the proper
functioning of the unit. It must always be kept in mind that a higher
pumping capacity is required when Antifrogen N is added to the cooling
water.
When antifreeze is used, no potential differences must occur in the

whole cooling system. If necessary, the components must be
connected with an equipotential bonding strip.
NOTE Where antifreeze is concerned, pay attention to the information given in

the safety data sheet!
Antifrogen N (made by Clariant, www.clariant.com) is preferred for use

as antifreeze.
The safety data sheet is appended.
Background:
Antifrogen N was thoroughly analysed for this application. Special
attention was given to compatibility with other materials and to
environmental and health aspects. Furthermore, many years of
experience have been gained with Antifrogen N, and the definition of
cooling water is based on this antifreeze agent.
In order to obtain the benefit of the good anti-corrosive properties of
Antifrogen N and water mixtures, the concentration of the mixture must
be at least 20 %.
The use of antifreeze places higher demands on cooling system
tightness because the surface tension of the Antifrogen and water
mixture is about 100 times smaller than that of pure water.
Hotwater-proof asbestos-based seals are suitable. For seals with

packing glands, graphite cord can be used. For pipe joints where hemp
is used, coating the hemp with fermit or fermitol has proved effective.
WARNING Antifrogen N can give rise to leakage at polytetrafluorethylene seals.
Proportion of Kinematic Relative Antifreeze

Antifrogen N viscosity pressure loss protection to
added [%] [mm²/s] [°C]
0 1.8 1.09
20 3.5 1.311 -10
34 4.72 1.537 -20
45 7.73 1.743 -30
Table 13-17 Antifrogen N material data at T = 0 °C coolant temperature
More than 45 % impedes heat dissipation and hence proper functioning

of the unit.
It must always be kept in mind that the pumping capacity required
for using Antifrogen N additive must be adjusted, and the
backpressure arising in the unit must also be taken into account.
The necessary coolant flow volume must be attained under all
circumstances.
The electrical conductivity of the coolant is increased when antifreeze is
added to the cooling water. Antifrogen N contains inhibitors to
counteract the attendant increased propensity for electrochemical
corrosion.
To prevent weakening of the inhibitors and the corrosion that would
then result, the following measures are necessary:
1. When the cooling system is drained, it must either be refilled with
the same mixture within 14 days, or it must be flushed out with water
several times and the heat sinks must then be blow through with
compressed air.
2. The water and Antifrogen N mixture must be renewed every 3 to 5
years.
If other antifreeze agents are used, they must be ethylene glycol
based. They must also have been approved by reputable companies in
the automotive industry (GM, Ford, Chrysler).
Example: DOWTHERM SR-1.
Concerning the electrical conductivity of the antifreeze and water
mixture, the antifreeze manufacturer's guidelines apply.
The water that is mixed with the antifreeze must strictly comply with the
defnition given in the Section "Definition of cooling water".
WARNING Use of other agents can shorten the service life.

Mixing different antifreeze agents is not permitted under any
circumstances.
13.1.3.3 Corrosion protection agent
We recommend the use of a corrosion protection inhibitor for the

cooling circuit, e.g. NALCO 00GE056 corrosion protection from
ONDEO Nalco (Nalco Deutschland GmbH, www.nalco.com,
D-60486 Frankfurt, Tel. +49-697934-410). Concentration of the
corrosion protection inhibitor in the cooling water 0.1 ... 0.14 %.
The cooling water should be checked 3 months after the first filling of
the cooling circuit and then once a year.
If any clouding, discoloration or bacteria are detected in the cooling
water, the cooling circuit has to be flushed out and refilled.
An inspection glass should be installed in the cooling circuit to be able
to monitor the cooling water easily.
13.1.4 Protection against condensation

Special measures are necessary to prevent condensation.
Condensation occurs when the cooling water inlet temperature is
considerably lower than the room temperature (air temperature). The
permissible temperature difference between cooling water and air
varies according to the relative humidity φ of the room air. The
temperature at which moist air will deposit droplets of water is called
the dew point.
The following table lists the dew points (in °C) for an atmospheric
pressure of
1 bar (≈ height 0 to 500 m above sea level). If the cooling water
temperature is lower than the value given, condensation must be
expected, i.e. the cooling water temperture must always be ≥ dew point.
Room φ= φ= φ= φ= φ= φ= φ= φ= φ= φ= φ=
temp. 20 % 30 % 40 % 50 % 60 % 70 % 80 % 85 % 90 % 95 % 100 %
°C
10 <0 <0 <0 0.2 2.7 4.8 6.7 7.6 8.4 9.2 10
20 <0 2 6 9.3 12 14.3 16.4 17.4 18.3 19.1 20
25 0.6 6.3 10.5 13.8 16.7 19.1 21.2 22.2 23.2 24.1 24.9
30 4.7 10.5 14.9 18.4 21.3 23.8 26.1 27.1 28.1 29 29.9
35 8.7 14.8 19.3 22.9 26 28.6 30.9 32 33 34 34.9
38 11.1 17.4 22 25.7 28.8 31.5 33.8 34.9 36 36.9 37.9
40 12.8 19.1 23.7 27.5 30.6 33.4 35.8 36.9 37.9 38.9 39.9
45 16.8 23.3 28.2 32 35.3 38.1 40.6 41.8 42.9 43.9 44.9
50 20.8 27.5 32.6 36.6 40 42.9 45.5 46.6 47.8 48.9 49.9
Table 13-18 Dew point temperature as a function of relative humidity φ and room
temperature at an altitude of 0 m above sea level
The dew point also depends on the absolute pressure, i.e. on altitude.
The dew points for low atmospheric pressures lie below the value for
sea level, and it is therefore always sufficient to plan the cooling water
supply temperature for an altitude of 0 m.
Various measures can be taken to afford protection against

condensation:
1. Temperature control is recommended for this purpose (see Fig.
13-3). The water temperature is controlled as a function of room
temperature. This method is certainly to be preferred where there
are high room temperatures, low water temperatures and high
humidities.
2. Physical dehumidifying. This is only effective in closed rooms. It
comprises operating an air/water heat exchanger with cold water to
constantly condense the moisture out of the room air.
3. A humidity alarm can be installed to give a warning when
condensation is imminent. Such an alarm is available from
ENDRICH (www.endrich.com); when the temperature falls to within
2 K of dew point, a signal contact closes.
13.1.5 Notes on materials

Cooling water installations with copper pipes and/or copper joints are to
be avoided and are possible only if special measures are taken, e.g.
closed cooling circuit, full filtering (i.e. copper ions are filtered out),
water additives (such as the products of (Nalco Deutschland GmbH;
www.nalco.com; D-60486 Frankfurt, Tel. +49-697934-410).
The hose connection nozzles on the heat sink side must be of stainless
steel or heavy gauge aluminium. Under no circumstances may the
connection nozzles be of brass or copper.
PVC hoses are not suitable for use with antifreeze!
Hard PVC pipes are suitable for use with the antifreeze agents listed in
Section "Antifreeze additive".
NOTICE The water cooling system must not contain any zinc at all.
Where antifreeze is used, please note:
zinc reacts with all glycol-based inhibitors.
Never use galvanized pipes for this reason!
If the plant incorporates normal iron pipes or cast iron

accessories (e.g. motor housings), a separate cooling system with
water/water heat exchangers is to be installed for the converters.
If a heat exchanger made of CuNi 90/10 is used, be sure to pay
attention to the water conductivity (hose) (see Section "Note regarding
installation and components").
13.1.6 Cabinet design an connection system
♦ Components not mounted on the heat sink, e.g. the electronic

devices and the DC link capacitors, are cooled by the heat
exchangers at the heat sink fins.
When a chassis unit is installed in a cubicle, make sure that the air
discharged by the fan can enter the inside of the chassis. For this
reason, there must be a clearance of at least 130 mm between top
of chassis and cubicle roof (or existing cover) for applications with
degrees of protection > IP42.
The compartmentalizations to be fitted to units with air-cooling are
counterproductive here! They must not be fitted.
♦ The units require no external cooling air.
It must nevertheless be kept in mind that additional heat losses of
other components in the cubicle, such as reactors, cannot be
extracted!
♦ The temperature of the cooling air circulating inside the chassis is
monitored with a sensor.
♦ If an application with degree of protection IP54 is set up, it is
necessary to close the gaps between the chassis side walls and the
cubicle walls.
♦ In cubicle systems, partition walls up to the top cover plate are to be
fitted between the units.
♦ If the units are operated with degree of protection IP54, the air
temperature inside the units during rated operation is distinctly
higher than the water supply temperature.
♦ One-inch internal threads are provided for the water connection.
The connection nipples must be of stainless steel or heavy gauge
aluminium. Ideally, flat seals should be used.
♦ If the connectors supplied with the units are used, they should be
sealed with Loctite 542.
♦ The “Goldschlange” (gold snake) hose made by Paguag is
recommended.
♦ For the joint, use is made of an NW25 screw-type sleeve for
“Goldschlange” hose with inside piece of V2A and a double nipple of
V2A.
♦ Cooling water supply (blue) and return (red) are to be connected in
accordance with the colour coding, which is to be found next to the
1-inch water connection beneath the heat sink.
13.1.7 Characteristic data of water-cooled units, types J, K and L

(M, Q, N, R)
The tables listed below give the rated water flow volume in l/min and
the pressure difference (in Pa) across the heat sink at rated flow
volume.
The water-cooled units have a lower power loss (i.e. a higher efficiency)
than the air-cooled units. The power loss is given in tables 13-19 to
13-21.
Background MASTERDRIVES with water-cooling have the same power rating as
the air-cooled units. Since the thermal resistance of the heat sinks for
the IGBT is distinctly better than that attainable with air-cooling, the
modules are operated with a junction temperature that is 20 K lower.
The result of this is that the module losses are about 5 % lower.
This effect also gives the modules a good life expectancy.
Many units are also equipped with small built-in fans. The lower power
losses of these can also be taken into account.
NOTE In the tables below, the data for new units or more exact data are
printed in bold type.
MLFB Flow Differential Sound Sound Sound Water Power

pressure level level level heating loss
IP20 IP42 IP54
[l/min] [Pa] [dBA]* [dBA]* [dBA]* [k] [kW]
6SE7035-1TJ60-1AA0 24 16900 76 75 72 4 5.58
6SE7036-0TJ60-1AA0 26 19840 76 75 72 4 6.39
6SE7037-0TJ60-1AA0 30 27270 76 75 72 4.5 7.74
6SE7037-0TK60-1AA0 30 9300 76 76 73 5 9.05
6SE7038-6TK60-1AA0 40 16560 76 76 73 5 10.4
6SE7041-1TK60-1AA0 46 21900 76 76 73 5 10.7
6SE7041-3TL60-1AA0 51 12000 75 74 71 5 12.3
Table 13-19 Characteristic data of DC units, 510 V to 650 V

IP20 IP42 IP54
6SE7033-0UJ60-1AA0 20 11740 76 75 72 4 4.84
6SE7033-5UJ60-1AA0 22 14660 76 75 72 4 5.58
6SE7034-5UJ60-1AA0 27 22090 76 75 72 4 6.75
6SE7035-7UK60-1AA0 28 8100 76 76 73 5 7.85
6SE7036-5UK60-1AA0 32 10600 76 76 73 5 8.8
6SE7038-6UK60-1AA0 38 14940 76 76 73 5 9.35
6SE7041-1UL60-1AA0 46 9750 75 74 71 5 12.2
6SE7041-2UL60-1AA0 53 12940 75 74 71 5 14.8
Table 13-20 Charactersitic data of DC units, 675 V to 810 V

IP20 IP42 IP54
6SE7033-0WJ60-1AA0 22 14200 76 75 72 4 5.6
6SE7033-5WJ60-1AA0 24 16900 76 75 72 4 6.0
6SE7034-5WJ60-1AA0 30 26410 76 75 72 4 7.5
6SE7035-7WK60-1AA0 31 9950 76 76 73 5 8.55
6SE7036-5WK60-1AA0 34 11960 76 76 73 5 9.95
6SE7038-6WK60-1AA0 42 18250 76 76 73 5 11.1
6SE7041-1WL60-1AA0 55 13950 76 75 72 5 15.2
6SE7041-2WL60-1AA0 70 22600 76 75 72 5 20.6
Table 13-21 Characteristic data of DC units, 890 V to 930 V
* The sound level was determined under the following boundary conditions:
Distance to the unit 1 m, height above floor level 1 m, distance to the next reflecting
wall 4 m, room height 6m.
The chassis were installed in Siemens 8MC cabinets without any special
soundproofing measures.
Fan voltage/frequency V/Hz 230/50 230/60

Current requirement types J and K A 2.45 3.6
Current requirement type L A 4.9 7.2
Sound pressure level IP20 dB(A) See tables See tables +1.0
Sound pressure level IP42 dB(A) See tables See tables +0.5
Sound pressure level IP54 dB(A) See tables See tables
Table 13-22 Operating data of fan for types J and K
Type Water contents (litres)

J 1.4
K 3.0
L 2.8
Table 13-23 Water contents of the heat sinks (± 10 %)
Data for units of The parallel connected units are configured as follows:
types M, Q, N and R ♦ Type M = 2 × K (with interphase transformer)
♦ Type Q = 2 × K (without interphase transformer)
♦ Type N = 2 × L.
Multi-parallel connected units of type R are composed of n × type K or
n × type L.
Twice the amount of flow is required for parallel connections (types M,
Q and N).
For multi-parallel connected units, the corresponding requirement is
calculated from the requirement for the single inverter multiplied by the
number of inverters.
Start-up The heat sinks have to be vented when the units are filled for the first
time.
The equipment has to be disconnected from the supply when venting is
performed.
♦ Dismantle the lock screw in front of the actual vent valve.
♦ Carry out venting.
Units of type E to G:
There is no vent valve on these units.
Venting has to take place externally via the free tap (see Fig. 13-3).
♦ Close the vent cock.
♦ Tighten the lock screw again.
♦ Check for tightness.
♦ The necessary volumetric flow must be ensured. The filters or
strainers have to be cleansed. Cleansing should be repeated at
regular intervals.
♦ If anti-freezing agents are used, the designation of the agent, its
manufacturer and its mixing ratio must be documented.
07.2005 Faults and Alarms
14 Faults and Alarms
14.1 Faults
General information regarding faults
For each fault, the following information is available:
Parameter r947 Fault number
r949 Fault value
r951 Fault list
P952 Number of faults
r782 Fault time
If a fault message is not reset before the electronic supply voltage is
switched off, then the fault message will be present again when the
electronic supply is switched on again. The unit cannot be operated
without resetting the fault message. (Exception: Automatic restart has
been selected, see P373).
Number / Fault Cause Counter-measure

F001 If a main contactor checkback is configured, P591 Src Contactor Msg
no checkback occurs within the time set in
Main contactor P600 after the power-up command. In the Parameter value must be in conformance with
checkback case of externally excited synchronous motors the connection of the main contactor
(P095 = 12), there is no checkback for the checkback.
excitation current unit.
Check the checkback loop of the main
contactor (or the checkback of the excitation
current unit in the case of synchronous
motors).
F002 When pre-charging, the minimum DC link Check the supply voltage,
voltage (P071 Line Volts x 1.34) of 80 % has
Pre-charging not been reached. Compare witth P071 Line Volts (Compare
P071 with the DC link voltage on DC units).
The maximum pre-charging time of 3 seconds
has been exceeded. Check the rectifier/regenerative unit on DC
units. The rectifier/regenerative unit must be
switched on before the inverter is switched on.
F006 Shutdown has occurred due to excessive DC Check the supply voltage or input DC voltage.
link voltage.
DC link overvoltage Converter is operating in regenerative mode
Line voltage I DC voltage range I Shutdown without feedback possibility.
value
------------------------------------------------------------- If the converter supply voltage is at the upper
200 V - 230 V I 270 V - 310 V I appr. 410 V tolerance limit and it is operating at full load,
380 V - 480 V I 510 V - 650 V I appr. 820 V F006 can also be caused by a line phase
500 V - 600 V I 675 V - 810 V I appr. 1020 V failure.
660 V - 690 V I 890 V - 930 V I appr. 1220 V
Possibly
For parallel-connected converters (BF M,N)
r949 = 1: Overvoltage in the DC link of the - Increaase P464 Decel Time,
master
r949 = 2: Overvoltage in the DC link of the - Activate P515 DC Bus Volts Reg (check
slave. P071 beforehand)
- Reduce P526 Fly Search Speed.
- Reduce P259 Max Regen Power (only for

P100 = 3, 4 or 5)
Faults and Alarms 07.2005

F008 The lower limit value of 76 % of the DC link Check
voltage (P071 Line Volts), or of 61 % when
DC link undervoltage kinetic buffering has been enabled, has been - Input DC voltage
fallen short of.
- DC link
Undervoltage in the DC link in 'normal'
operation (i.e. no SIMULATION).
Undervoltage in the DC link with active kinetic

buffering and speed less than 10 % of the
rated motor speed.
It was a 'brief power failure' which was not

detected until system recovery (auto restart
flag).
F010 Due to excessive DC link voltage, shutdown Check the supply voltage
has taken place: Check the braking resistor
DC link overvoltage Line voltage DC link range Shutdown Converter operates regeneratively without a
value feedback possibility. Braking unit must be set
380 V - 480 V 510 V - 650 V 740 V to the lower response threshold (673 V)
Note:
Only at U800 = 1 and f(Pulse) > f(derating)
Lower threshold value than F006 !

F011 Overcurrent shutdown has occurred. - Check the converter output for short-circuit or
The shutdown threshold has been exceeded. earth fault
Overcurrent
- Check the load for an overload condition
- Check whether motor and converter are

correctly matched
- Check whether the dynamic requirements

are too high
F012 During excitation of the induction motor, the Only for closed loop n/f/T control (P100 = 3, 4
current did not rise above 12.5 % of the or 5)
I too low setpoint magnetizing current for no-load
operation. If no motor is connected, go into the simulation
mode P372.
Check current detection, check power section.

F014 During excitation of the motor, the current Check the output contactor
component is less than 25 % of the motor no- Check the motor cable
I too low load current.
Note:
Only for U800 = 1
Irrespective of the type of control
(Difference to F012)

F015 Motor has stalled or is locked: - Reduce load
Motor stall - if the static load is too high - Release brake
- if the acceleration or deceleration time is too - Increase current limits

fast, or if load change is too fast and too great,
- Increase P805 PullOut/BlckTime
- due to incorrect parameterization of the pulse
encoder pulse number P151 or of the analog - Increase P792 response threshold for
tachometer scaling P138 set/actual deviation
- due to disturbed speed signals (tachometer Only for f/n/T control (P100 = 3, 4, 5)
shield not connected)
- Increase torque limits or torque setpoint
The fault is only generated after the time set in
P805. Only n/T control or v/f control with speed
controller: (P100 = 0, 4, 5)
The binector B0156 is set in the status word 2
r553 Bit 28. - Check tachometer cable break
To detect whether the drive is blocked, see - Check pulse encoder pulse number
P792 (Perm Deviation) and P794. With n/f
control, this fault is tripped if the torque limits - Check analog tachometer scaling
have been reached (B0234).
- Connect shield of tachometer cable on motor
With speed control (P100 = 4) and master side and converter side
drive (see P587), the fault can also point to an
interruption in the encoder cable. This case - Reduce smoothing of speed pre-control P216
has the same significance as if the drive is (only n/T control)
locked. only frequency control:(P100 = 3)
With v/f control, the I(max) controller has to be - Slow down acceleration time (see also P467
activated (P331). The monitor does not ProtRampGen Gain)
operate with v/f textile applications (P100 = 2). - Increase current in the lower frequency range
Motor has stalled or is locked: (P278, P279, P280)
In the case of synchronous motors (P095 = - Switch in speed controller pre-control

12, 13): by reaching the maximum frequency (P471>0)
- Set EMF controller more dynamically (315) to
In the case of externally excited synchronous max. approx. 2
motors (P095 = 12): as a result of missing or
excessively high excitation current (flux is too - Increase changeover frequency for the EMF
small or too great). model (P313)
- Replace by speed control with pulse encoder
When the maximum frequency (including in the case of overmodulated n/f controller
control reserves) (B0254) has been reached
on synchronous motors, the fault is generated - Track speed setpoint with the speed actual
immediately. If the deviations in the rotor flux value so that the set/actual deviation is always
are too great, first of all, the converter current less than that set in P792.
is switched to zero, the excitation current is
reduced and, after some time, the fault Only for synchronous motor: (P095 = 12)
message is tripped at the level of the double
damping time constant (2*r124.1). During this - Check current limits of the excitation unit.
wait time, the status word bit B0156 (r553.28)
is set already. - Check excitation current setpoint and actual
value (incl. wiring)
- Check voltage limits of the excitation unit

during dynamic current changes.
- Check drive system for resonance

oscillations.
F018 The found set frequency could not be - Check additional setpoint 2
implemented. Reasons: - Release negative directions of rotation with
F set fly - Additional setpoint 2 too high low maximum speed.
- Speed actual-value at standstill negative
(signal ripple) and negative direction of
rotation locked.

F019 During flying restart without tachometer: Power up after coasting.
Search in both directions of rotation not Possibly increase P525 Fly Search Amps.
Motor not found possible (one direction blocked) and motor has Enable both directions of rotation (P571,
not been found. P572)
F020 The motor temperature limit value has been Check the motor (load, ventilation, etc.). The
exceeded. current motor temperature can be read in r009
Motor temperature Motor Temperature.
r949 = 1 limit value of motor temperature
exceeded Check P381 Mot Tmp
r949 = 2 short-circuit in the cable to the motor Fault - check the KTY84 input at connector
temperature sensor or sensor defective -X103:29,30, or X104:29,30 (Compact PLUS)
for short-circuit.
r949 = 4 wire break in the cable to the motor
temperature sensor or sensor defective
r949 = 5 wire break and limit value exceeded

F021 Parameterized limit value of the I2t monitoring Check: P383 Mot Tmp T1
for the motor has been exceeded.
Motor I2t
F023 The limit value of the inverter temperature has - Measure the air intake and ambient
been exceeded. temperature
Inverter temperature (Observe minimum and maximum ambient
Alarm: (r949): temperature!)
Bit0 Inverter overtemperature
- Observe the derating curves at theta >45°C
Bit1 Wire break of cable to (Compact PLUS type) or 40°C.
temperature sensor
- On Compact PLUS units: ≥ 22 kW
Bit4 Number of the temperature sensor acknowledgement is only possible after 1
Bit5 minute
Bit6
Check:
Bit8 Multiparallel circuit: Slave number
Bit9 - whether the fan -E1 is connected and is
Bit10 rotating in the correct direction
Examples: - that the air entry and discharge openings are

r949 = 1: Limit value of inverter temperature not restricted
has been exceeded.
- temperature sensor at -X30
r949 = 2: Sensor 1: wire break of sensor cable
or sensor defective
r949 = 18: Sensor 2: wire break of sensor

cable or sensor defective

cable or sensor defective

cable or sensor defective.
F025 UCE upper switch (Compact PLUS) / or UCE Check:
has tripped in phase L1
UCE upper switch/ - phase L1 for short-circuit or ground fault
UCE Ph. L1 (-X2:U2 - including motor)
- that CU is correctly inserted
- that the switch for "SAFE STOP" (X9/5-6) is

open (only for units with order No. ...-11,
...-21,...-31, ...-61).

F026 UCE lower switch (Compact PLUS) / or UCE Check:
UCE lower switch / - phase L2 for short-circuit or ground fault
UCE Ph. L2 (-X2:V2 - including motor)
- that the switch for 'SAFE STOP' (X9/5-6) is

open (only for units with order Nos....-11,
...-21,...-31, ...-61)
F027 Fault pulse resistor (Compact PLUS) / or UCE Check:
Fault pulse resistor / - phase L3 for short-circuit or ground fault
UCE Ph. L3 (-X2:W2 - including motor)
- that the switch for 'SAFE STOP' (X9/5-6) is

open (only for units with order Nos....-11,
...-21,...-31, ...-61)
F028 The frequency and the amplitude of the DC Check the supply voltage.
link ripple indicate a single-phase power
Supply phase failure.
F029 A fault has occurred in the measured value Causes in phase L1 and L2:
sensing system: - Fault in measured value sensing system
Meas. value sensing - Fault in power section (valve cannot block)
The measured variable at which a fault - Fault on CU
occurred during offset adjustment is bit-coded
and stored in r949 : Causes on all other measured variables:
Bit 0: Current phase L1 - Fault on CU (SIMA) -> replace CU
Bit 1: Current phase L2
Bit 2: DC link voltage
Bit 3: Inverter temperature
Bit 4: Motor temperature
Bit 5: Analog input 1
Bit 6: Analog input 2
Examples:
- (r949 = 1) Offset adjustment in phase L1 not
possible
- (r949 = 2) Offset adjustment in phase L3 not

possible.
- (r949 = 3) Offset adjustment in phases L1

and L3 not possible.
F035 Parameterizable external fault input 1 has Check:
been activated
Ext. Fault 1 - whether there is an external fault
- whether the cable to the appropriate digital

input has been interrupted
- P575 Src No ExtFault1

F036 Parameterizable external fault input 2 has Check:
been activated
Ext. Fault 2 - whether there is an external fault
- whether the cable to the appropriate digital

input has been interrupted
- P585 Src No ExtFault2

F037 An analog input is taking place in operating Check the connection to
mode 4..20 mA and a wire break has
Analog input occurred. The number of the analog input - Analog input 1 -X102:15, 16,
concerned is shown in fault value (r949). or -X101:9,10 (Compact PLUS).
- Analog input 2 -X102: 17, 18.
Check parameters
- P632 CU AnaIn Conf

- P634 CU AnaIn Smooth
- P631 CU AnaIn Offset
F038 During a parameter task, a voltage failure has Re-enter the parameter. The number of the
occurred on the board. parameter concerned can be seen in fault
Voltage OFF during value r949.
parameter storage
F040 Incorrect operating status Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)
AS internal
F041 A fault has occurred when storing the values in Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
the EEPROM. (Compact PLUS)
EEPROM fault
F042 Calculating time problems Reduce the calculating time load:
Calculating time At least 10 failures of time slots T2, T3, T4 or - Increase P357 Sampling Time
T5 (see also parameters r829.2 to r829.5)
- Calculate individual blocks in a slower
sampling time
Observe r829 CalcTimeHdroom.

F044 A fault has occurred during the softwiring of Fault value r949:
binectors and connectors. >1000 : Fault during softwiring of connectors
BICO manager fault >2000 : Fault during softwiring of binectors
- Voltage OFF and ON

- Factory setting and new parameterization
- Replace the board
F045 A hardware fault has occurred when accessing - Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
an option board (Compact PLUS)
Opt. Board HW
- Check connection of the board subrack to the
option boards and replace if necessary.
F046 A fault has occurred during the transfer of Power the unit down and up again.
parameters to the gating unit processor.
Par. Task Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)
F047 The calculating time in the gating unit Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
computer is not sufficient (Compact PLUS)
Gating Calc Time
In case of synchronous motors (P095 = 12):
Pulse frequency set too high (P340>2kHz).
F048 The pulse frequency set in P340 is not Change P340 Pulse Frequency.
permissible.
Gating Pulse Freq
F049 The firmware versions on the CU have Use uniform firmware
different firmware release.
SW version
F050 Error when initializing the TSY board Check:
TSY Init. - Whether the TSY is correctly inserted

F051 Digital tachometer or analog tachometer Check the parameters:
sensing are faulty
Speed encoder - P130 Src SpdActV
- P151 Pulse #
- P138 AnalogTachScale
- P109 Motor #PolePairs
The product of P109 and P138 must be

smaller than 19200. Check or replace
tachometer. Check connection to tachometer.
- Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit

(Compact PLUS type)
F052 Control track input (-X103/27, or -X104/27 Unselect tachometer with control track (P130
Compact PLUS) is not high: select motor encoder)
n-Cntr.Input - Tachometer line broken
- Tachometer fault Check control track connection (-X103/27, or
X104/27 Compact PLUS)
The fault input on the TSY was activated.
Exchange TSY
F053 The permissible change value of the speed Check tachometer cables for interruptions.
encoder signal P215 dn(act,perm) has been Check earthing of tachometer shield.
Tachometer dn/dt doubly exceeded.
- The shield must be connected both at the
motor and the converter side.
- The encoder cable must not be interrupted.
- The encoder cable must not be laid together

with the power cables.
- Only recommended encoders should be

used.
- In the case of a signal fault, the DT1 board

may have to be used. If necessary, change
P215
- With P806
(observe parameter description) it is possible
during operation to switch over to encoder-free
operation.
F054 A fault has occurred during initialization of the Fault value r949
encoder board.
Sensor board 1. Board code incorrect
initialization fault 2. TSY not compatible
3. SBP not compatible
7. Board double
20: TSY board double
60: Internal error

F056 Communication on the SIMOLINK ring is - Check the fiber-optic cable ring
disturbed.
SIMOLINK telegram - Check whether an SLB in the ring is without
failure voltage
- Check whether an SLB in the ring is faulty
- Check P741 (SLB TlgOFF)

F057 The brake has not opened, the output current Check brake
of the converter has exceeded the Check I(max) brake (U840). The set threshold
Brake does not open parameterized current threshold (U840) for must be at least 10% above the maximum
longer than one second (with the rotor locked) possible acceleration current.
Note:
Only with U800 = 1
F058 A fault has occurred during the processing of a No remedy
parameter task.
Parameter fault
Parameter task
F059 A fault has occurred in the initialization phase The number of the inconsistent parameter is
during the calculation of a parameter. indicated in fault value r949. Correct this
Parameter fault after parameter (ALL indices) and switch voltage off
factory setting/init. and on again. Several parameters may be
affected, i.e. repeat process.
F060 This is set if the MLFB = 0 after exiting After acknowledgement, in INITIALIZATION
INITIALIZATION (0.0 kW). MLFB = order enter a suitable MLFB in parameter P070
MLFB is missing number. MLFB (6SE70..). (Only possible with the
corresponding access stages to both access
parameters).
F061 A parameter entered during drive setting (e.g. Acknowledge the fault and change the
P107 Mot Rtd Freq, P108 Mot Rtd Speed, corresponding parameter value. The missing
Incorrect P340 Pulse Frequency) is not in a permissible parameter is indicated in r949 as a fault value.
parameterization range (depending on control type)

F062 Fault in connection with the multi-parallel r949 = 10:
circuit or board ImP1 has been detected. Communications card does not reply. When
Multi-parallel circuit writing the control word, BUSY is not active if
CSOUT is inactive. Communications card is
probably not inserted.
R949 = 11,12:
Timeout during BUSY during initialization.
BUSY does not become active within 1 sec.
R949 = 15:
Timeout during BUSY during normal
communication. BUSY does not become
active within 1 sec.
R949 = 18:
Timeout when reading out the fault information
from the ImPIs. Within one second after
activation of FAULT no fault cause can be
supplied by the IMP1.
R949 = 20+i:
HW conflict. This is set if bit HWCONF is set in
status word of slave i. (Fault in the
configuration of the multi-parallel circuit)
r949 = 30+i:
HW version of ImPI isnot compatible. The
relevant slave number is contained in i.
R949 = 40:
Number of slaves does not tally with the
setpoint number of slaves of the unit.
R949 = 50+i
Inconsistency in the number of slaves. The
number of slaves notified by the ImPI is not in
conformance with the number of status words
or with the setpoint number of slaves of the
MLFB.
Counter-measure:
- Check ImPI or communications card and
replace, if necessary.
- Check configuration of multi-parallel circuit.
- Check parameterization.
- Replace CU.
- Replace ImPI.
F065 No telegram was received at an Scom Fault value r949:
interface (Scom/USS protocol) within the
Scom Telegram telegram failure time. 1 = interface 1 (SCom1)
2 = interface 2 (SCom2)
- Check the connection CU -X100:1 to 5 and
check the connection PMU -X300.
- Check the connection CU -X103, or

X100/ 35,36 (Compact PLUS type)
- Check "SCom/SCB TLG OFF" P704.01
(SCom1) and P704.02 (SCom2)
- Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
(Compact PLUS type)

F070 A fault has occurred during initialization of the Fault value r949:
SCB board.
SCB initialization fault 1: Board code incorrect
2: SCB board not compatible
5: Error in configuration data
(Check parameterization)
6: Initialization timeout
7: SCB board double
10: Channel error
EB board. 2: 1st EB1 not compatible
EB initialization fault 3: 2nd EB1 not compatible
4: 1st EB2 not compatible
5: 2nd EB2 not compatible
21: Three EB1 boards
22: Three EB2 boards
110: Fault on 1st EB1 (Analog input)

120: Fault on 2nd EB1 (Analog input)
210: Fault on 1st EB2 (Analog input)
220: Fault on 2nd EB2 (Analog input)
F073 4 mA at analog input 1, slave 1 fallen short of Check the connection of the signal source to
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 4, 5.
AnInp1SL1
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 7, 8.
AnInp2 SL1
the SCI1 (slave 1) -X428: 10, 11.
AnInp3 SL1
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 4, 5.
AnInp1 SL2
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 7, 8.
AnInp2 SL2
the SCI1 (slave 2) -X428: 10, 11.
AnInp3 SL2
F079 No telegram has been received by the SCB - Check the connections of the SCB1(2).
(USS, peer-to-peer, SCI) within the telegram
SCB telegram failure failure time. - Check P704.03"SCom/SCB Tlg OFF"
- Replce SCB1(2)
- Replace CU (-A10)
F080 Fault during initialization of the board at the Fault value r949:
DPR interface 1: Board code incorrect
TB/CB initialization 2: TB/CB board not compatible
fault 3: CB board not compatible
7: TB/CB board double
10: Channel error
Check the T300/CB board for correct

contacting, check the PSU power supply,
check the CU / CB / T boards and check the
CB initialization parameters:
- P918.01 CB Bus Address,
- P711.01 to P721.01 CB parameters 1 to 11

F081 Heartbeat-counter of the optional board is no Fault value r949:
longer being processed 0: TB/CB heatbeat-counter
OptBrdHeartbeat- 1: SCB heartbeat-counter
Counter 2: Additional CB heartbeat-counter
- Acknowledge the fault (whereby automatic

reset is carried out)
- If the fault re-occurs, replace the board
concerned (see fault value)
- Replace ADB
- Check the connection between the subrack
and the optional boards (LBA) and replace, if
necessary
F082 No new process data have been received by Fault value r949:
the TB or the CB within the telegram failure 1 = TB/CB
TB/CB telegram failure time. 2 = additional CB
- Check the connection to TB/CB
- Check P722 (CB/TB TlgOFF)
- Replace CB or TB
CB board. 1: Board code incorrect
Add. CB initialization 2: TB/CB board not compatible
fault 3: CB board not compatible
7: TB/CB board double
10: Channel error
Check the T300 / CB board for correct

contacting and check the CB initialization
parameters:
- P918.02 CB Bus Address,
- P711.02 to P721.02 CB Parameters 1 to 11
F087 A fault has occurred during initialization of the - Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
SLB board. (Compact PLUS type)
SIMOLINK initialization
fault - Replace SLB
F090 An error occurred when attempting to change Power down and power up again. If it
a parameter from the standstill measurement reoccurs, replace CU (-A10), or replace the
Mld Param. or the rotating measurement (Mot ID). unit (Compact PLUS type)
F091 The rotating measurement takes longer than Eliminate the cause and re-start the
programmed in a measured status. The measurement (power up the converter again).
Mld Time relevant measuring interval is encrypted in If it re-occurs, replace CU (-A10), or replace
parameter r949. Possible causes: the unit (Compact PLUS type).
Load torque too high
Load torque not uniform
Ramp-function generator disabled
F095 Due to entries for There must be a 10 % frequency range which
- Permissible phase sequence lies above 1.1 times the changeover frequency
Mld n(set) - Maximum frequency, and below 0.9 times the start of field-
- Minimum speed, weakening frequency.
- Changeover frequency between V and I
model, Possible counter-measures
- Start of field-weakening frequency,
- Frequency suppression bandwidth - Permit both phase sequences
it was not possible to determine a permissible
frequency range for the rotating measurement. - Increase maximum frequency
- Reduce minimum speed,
- Reduce changeover frequency between the

V and I model.
- Reduce or remove the frequency

suppression bandwidth.

F096 The rotating measurement was aborted due to The fault value in r949 defines the type of
the inadmissible external intervention. intervention:
Mld abort
4 Setpoint inhibit
5 Changeover, setpoint channel
8 Unexpected change in the converter status
12 Motor data set changeover (for function

selection "Compl. Mot ID")
13 Changeover to slave drive
14 Motor data set changeover to data set with

v/f_charac
15 Controller inhibit is set
16 Ramp-function generator is disabled
17 Selection "Tacho test" for F controller
18 Ramp-function generator stopped

Eliminate cause
22 Inverter inhibit:
Check inverter release (P561)
F097 The measured values for the nominal ramp-up If necessary, increase the torque limit values
time when optimizing the controller deviate too to 100 percent
Mld meausred value greatly.
Cause: very unsteady load torque
F098 The rotating measurement has detected a fault The fault value in r949 defines the type of
in the speed actual value signal. The fault intervention
Mld Tachof value defines the type of fault. 4 No speed signal present
The fault measurement may have been 5 Sign of the signal is incorrect
erroneously generated if the drive speed is 6 A track signal is missing
externally forced (e.g. completely locked drive 7 Incorrect gain
generates the "no signal" message) 8 Incorrect pulse number
Checking the measurement cables.
Checking the parameters

- P130 Src Speed ActV
- P1151 Encoder Pulse #
F100 During the ground fault test, a current not The cause of the fault can be read out from
equal to zero has been measured, or an UCE r376 "GrdFltTestResult".
GRND Init or overcurrent monitoring has responded,
although no value has yet been triggered. Check the converter output for short-circuit or
ground fault
(-X2:U2, V2, W2 - including motor).
Check that the CU is inserted correctly.
Sizes 1 and 2:
- Check the transistor modules on the PEU
board -A23 for short-circuit.
Size 3 and 4:
- Check the transistor modules -A100, -A200,

-A300 for short-circuit

F101 During the ground fault test, the UCE Check valves in the power section for short-
monitoring has responded in a phase in which circuit, and on converters with fiber-optic
GRND UCE no valve has been triggered. gating, check the gating unit wiring and the
UCE checkbacks for correct assignment.
R376 can be interrogated to indicate which

UCE monitoring has responded.
F102 During the ground fault test, a current flows in The fault value can be read out from r949. The
a phase in which no valve has been triggered digit of the xth position indicates the valve
GRND Phase or the UCE monitoring has responded in the where the fault occurred at power-up.
phase in which the valve has been triggered.
X O O O x = 1 = V+ x = 2 = V- x = 3 = U+
x = 4 = U- x = 5 = W+ x = 6 = W-
The figure of the xth digit indicates the phase

in which I is 0 and thus a valve must be
defective (always conductive).
O O O X x = 1 Phase 1 (U)
x = 3 = Phase 3 (W)
x = 4 = Phase 1 (U) or 3 (W)
Examine phase for defective valves (always

conductive).
F103 There is a ground fault or a fault in the power Read out fault value from r949. The digit of the
section. xth position indicates the valve where the fault
Ground fault occurred at power-up.
During the ground fault test, a current flows
from the phase in which a valve has been XOOO x = 1 = V+ x = 2 = V- x = 3 =U+
triggered, the overcurrent comparator has XOOO x = 4 = U- x = 5 = W+ x = 6 = W-
responded, or a UCE monitoring has
responded in a phase in which a valve has Check the motor including the feeder cable for
been triggered. short-circuit. If no ground fault is present,
check the power section for defective valves
(always conductive).
The digit of the xth position indicates the

phase in which I is 0 and therefore a valve
must be defective (always conductive).
OOOX 1 = Current in phase 1 (U)

2 = UCE in phase 2 (V)
3 = Current in phase 3 (W)
4 = Only overcurrent occurred
The speed of the motor shaft during the

ground-fault test should be less than 10 % of
the rated speed!
1) In phase V there is a ground fault or a

defective valve or the "SAFE STOP" switch
(X9/5-6) is open (only for units with Order No.
...-11, ...-21, ...-31).

F107 A fault has occurred during the test pulse Read out fault value from r949. The figures of
measurement the grey shaded areas indicate which fault has
MLd = 0 occurred.
OOXX xx = 01: Both current actual values

remain 0
xx = 02: Motor-converter cable
phase U interrupted
xx = 03: Motor converter phase V
interrupted
xx = 04: Motor-converter phase W
interrupted
xx = 05: Current actual value I1
remains 0
xx = 06: Current actual value I3
remains 0
xx = 07: Valve U+ does not trigger
xx = 08: Valve U- does not trigger
xx = 09: Valve V+ does not trigger
xx = 10: Valve V- does not trigger
xx = 11: Valve W+ does not trigger
xx = 12: Valve W- does not trigger
xx = 13: Sign I1 incorrect
xx = 14: Sign I3 incorrect
xx = 15: Sign I1 and I3 incorrect
xx = 16: Sign I1 confused with I3
xx = 17: I1 confused with I3 and
both currents have an
incorrect sign
The digit of the xth digit indicates where the

fault has occurred.
XOOO x = 0 = Single converter

x = 1 = Inverter 1
x = 2 = Inverter 2
x = 3 = Inverters 1 and 2
Check that all 3 motor feeder cables and the

motor windings do not have any interruption.
Check the connection between the current
converter and the electronics and check the
current converter itself. Check the correct input
of the rating plate data for the motor data set
valid during the measurement.
F108 During the DC measurement, the Read out fault value from r949. The digit of the
measurement results for the individual phases xth position indicates;
Mld Unsym differ significantly. The fault value indicates
which quantity(ies) is(are) concerned and in OOOX Transverse voltage too high
which phase the greatest deviation occurred. x = 1 = phase R
x = 2 = phase S
x = 3 = phase T
OOXO Dev. stator resistance

(1, 2, 3 as above)
XOOO Dev. dead-time compensation

(1, 2, 3 as above)
X O O O O Dev. valve voltage

(1, 2, 3 as above)
The motor, power section or actual-value

sensing are significantly non-symmetrical.
F109 The rotor resistance determined during DC - Incorrect input of rated speed or rated
measurement deviates too significantly from frequency
Mld R(L) the value which was calculated by the
automatic parameterization from the rated slip. - Pole pair number incorrect

F110 During test pulse measurement, the current - There may be a short-circuit between two
has increased significantly faster than was converter outputs.
Mld di/dt expected. Thus for the 1st test pulse, an
overcurrent condition occurred within the first - The motor rating plate data have not been
half of the minimum switch-on time correctly parameterized.
- The motor leakage is too low.

F111 A fault has occurred while calculating the
equalization function.
Fault e_Func
F112 The individual leakage test results deviate too
significantly.
Unsym I_sigma
F114 The converter has automatically stopped the Re-start with P115 function selection = 2
automatic measurement due to the time limit "Motor identification at standstill". The ON
MId OFF up to power-up having been exceeded or due command must be given within 20 sec. after
to an OFF command during the measurement, the alarm message A078 = standstill
and has reset the function selection in P115. measurement has appeared.
Cancel the OFF command and re-start

measurement.
F115 A fault has occurred during calculations in the Power-down the converter and electronics and
context of the MotID. power-up again.
KF internal
F116 See TB documentation See TB documentation
Technology board fault
































F148 An active signal is present at binector U061 Examine cause of fault, see function diagram
(1). 710
Fault 1
Function blocks
(1). 710
Fault 2
Function blocks
(1). 710
Fault 3
Function blocks

(1). 710
Fault 4
Function blocks
F153 Within the monitoring time of the tool interface Cyclically execute write tasks from the tool
no valid sign-of-life has been received from the interface within the monitoring time whereby
No valid sign-of-life tool tool interface. the sign-of-life has to be increased by 1 for
interface every write task.
F243 Fault in internal linking. One of the two linked Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit
partners does not reply. (Compact PLUS).
Link int.
F244 Fault in the internal parameter linking Release comparison of gating unit software
and operating software regarding the transfer
ParaLink int. parameters.
Replace CU (-A10), or replace the unit

(Compact PLUS type).
F255 A fault has occurred in the EEPROM. Switch off the unit and switch it on again. If the
fault re-occurs, replace CU (-A10), or replace
Fault in EEPROM the unit (Compact PLUS).
Table 14-1 Fault numbers, causes and their counter-measures
14.2 Alarms
The alarm message is periodically displayed on the PMU by A = alarm/
alarm message and a 3-digit number. An alarm cannot be
acknowledged. It is automatically deleted once the cause has been
eliminated. Several alarms can be present. The alarms are then
displayed one after the other.
When the converter is operated with the OP1S operator control panel,
the alarm is indicated in the lowest operating display line. The red LED
additionally flashes (refer to the OP1S operating instructions).
Number / Alarm Cause Counter-measure

A001 The calculating time utilization is too high - Observe r829 CalcTimeHdroom
- Increase P357 Sampling Time or
Calculating time a) At least 3 failures of time slots T6 or T7 (see - Reduce P340 Pulse Frequency
also parameter r829.6 or r829.6)
b) At least 3 failures of time slots T2, T3, T4 or

T5 (see also parameter r829.2 to r829.5)
A002 Start of the SIMOLINK ring is not functioning. - Check the fiber-optic cable ring for
interruptions
SIMOLINK start alarm
- Check whether there is an SLB without
voltage in the ring
- Check whether there is a faulty SLB in the

ring
A014 The DC link voltage is not equal to 0 when the - Set P372 to 0.
simulation mode is selected (P372 = 1).
Simulation active alarm - Reduce DC link voltage (disconnect the
converter from the supply)
A015 Parameterizable external alarm input 1 has Check
been activated.
External alarm 1 - whether the cable to the corresponding
digital input has been interrupted.
- parameter P588 Src No Ext Warn1

A016 Parameterizable external alarm input 2 has Check
been activated.
External alarm 2 - whether the cable to the corresponding
digital input has been interrupted.
- parameter P589 Src No Ext Warn2

A017 The switch for blocking the inverter pulses (X9 Close switch X9 5-6 and thus release the
terminal 5-6) has been opened (only for units inverter pulses.
Safe Stop alarm active with Order No. ...-11, ...-21, ...-31, ...61)
A020 An overcurrent condition has occurred. Check the driven load for an overload
condition.
Overcurrent
- Are the motor and the converter matched?
- Have the dynamic performance requirements

been exceeded.
A021 An overvoltage condition has occurred. Check the supply voltage. The converter
regenerates without regeneration possibility.
Overvoltage

A022 The threshold for initiating an alarm has been - Measure intake air or ambient temperature.
exceeded.
Inverter temperature - Observe the derating curves at theta >45°C
(Compact PLUS) or 40°C.
Check
- Whether the fan -E1 is connected and is

rotating in the correct direction.
-The air intake and discharge openings for

blockage.
- The temperature sensor at -X30.
- r833 indicates the maximum converter

temperature of all existing measuring points
(Compact/chassis type unit).
- r833.01 indicates the actual converter

temperature (Compact PLUS type).
A023 The parameterizable threshold for initiating an Check the motor (load, ventilation, etc.). The
alarm has been exceeded. current temperature can be read in r009 Motor
Motor temperature Tmp.
Check the KTY84 input at connector
-X103:29,30, or -X104:29,30 (Compact PLUS
type) for short-circuit.
A024 The motor has moved during motor data Lock the motor.
identification.
Motor movement
A025 If the instantaneous load condition is Check:
maintained, then the inverter will be thermally - P72 Rtd Drive Amps
I2t Inverter overloaded. - MLFB P70
- P128 Imax
- r010 Drive Utilizat
A026 Ud is above the continuously permissible DC
link voltage for more than 30sec in a time
Ud too high interval of 90sec
A029 The parameterized limit value for the I2t Motor load cycle is exceeded!
monitoring of the motor has been exceeded.
I2t motor Check the parameters:
P382 Motor Cooling

P383 Mot Tmp T1
P384 Mot Load Limits
A033 Bit 3 in r553 status word 2 of the septoint P804 Overspeed Hys plus
channel. The speed actual value has
Overspeed exceeded the value of maximum speed plus P452 n/f(max, FWD Spd) or
the set hysteresis.
P453 n/f(max, REV Spd) has been exceeded
Increase the parameter for the maximum

frequencies or reduce the regenerative load.
A034 Bit 8 in r552 status word 1 of the setpoint Check
channel. The difference between freqeuncy
Setpoint/actual value setpoint/actual value is greater than the - whether an excessive torque requirement is
deviation parameterized value and the control present
monitoring time has elapsed.
- whether the motor has been dimensioned too
small.
Increase values P792 Perm Deviation Frq/

set/actual DevSpeed and P794 Deviation Time
A035 The clockwise and/or the counter-clockwise Check whether cable(s) to the corresponding
rotating field is not enabled, or a wire digital input(s) P572 Src FWD Spd / P571 Src
Wire break breakage is present in the terminal wiring REV Spd is (are) interrupted or released
(both control word bits are zero).

A036 The brake checkback indicates the "Brake still Check brake checkback (see FD 470)
closed" state.
Brake checkback
"Brake still closed"
A037 The brake checkback indicates the "Brake still Check brake checkback (see FD 470)
open" state.
Brake checkback
"Brake still open"
A041 The line voltage is too high or the drive line Check
voltage (P071) is incorrectly parameterized.
Vdmax controller inhibit The Vdmax controller is disabled despite - the line voltage
parameter access (P515), as otherwise the - P071 Line Volts
motor would accelerate immediately in
operation to the maximum frequency.
A042 Motor is stalled or blocked. Check
Motor stall/lock The alarm cannot be influenced by P805 - whether the drive is locked
"PullOut/BlckTime", but by P794 "Deviation - whether the encoder cable is interruped
Time" during speed control and whether the shield is
connected.
- Whether the drive has stalled
- For synchronous motors (P095=12):
excitation current injection
A043 The permissible change value of the speed Check the tachometer cables for interruptions.
encoder signal (P215) has been exceeded.
n-act jump Check the earthing of the tachometer shield.
Additionally for synchronous motors - The shield must be connected both on the
(P095=12): motor and on the converter side.
The motor rotates with more than 2% of the
rated speed at the time of inverter release. - The encoder cable must not be interrupted.
The inverter status "Ready for operation" is not
exited. - The encoder cable must not be laid with the
power cables.
- Only the recommended encoders should be
used.
- If there is a signal fault, use the DTI board if
necessary. If required, change P215.
- Additionally for synchronous motors
(P095=12):
Do not grant inverter release until the motor is
at standstill
A044 Only for synchronous motors (P095=12) in Only for synchronous motors P095=12)
operation: Check:
I too low The difference smoothed with P159 between
excitation current setpoint and actual value - whether the current limitation of the excitation
(r160 - r156) deviates from zero by more than current control is too small,
25 % of the rated magnetizing current. - whether the dynamic performance of the
excitation current injection is too low,
- whether the excitation current injection
function is operating,
- whether the wiring of excitation current
actual-value P155 is correct,
- whether the wiring of excitation current
setpoint r160 is correct,
- whether there is a wire break between
MASTERDRIVES and the excitation device,
- whether the voltage limitation is too low for
dynamic excitation current control,
- whether the analog output for r160 takes
place without isolating amplifiers (despite
cable length > 4 m)

A045 The DC braking function has been activated - Increase frequency at which DC braking
and the motor frequency is still above the begins
DC braking activated frequency at which DC braking begins (P398).
A049 At serial I/O (SCB1 with SCI1/2), no slave is P690 SSCI AnaIn Conf
connected or fiber-optic cable is interrupted or
No slave slaves are without voltage. - Check slave.
- Check cable.
A050 At ser. I/O the slaves required according to a Check parameter P693 (analog outputs), P698
parameterized configuration are not present (digital outputs). Check connectors
Slave incorrect (slave number or slave type): Analog inputs or K4101...K4103, K4201...K4203 (analog inputs)
outputs or digital inputs or outputs have been and binectors B4100...B4115, B4120...B4135,
parameterized which are not physically B4200...B4215, B4220...B4235 (digital inputs)
present. for connecting.
A051 In a peer-to-peer connection a baud rate has Adjust the baud rate in conjunction with the
been selected which is too high or too SCB boards P701 SCom/SCB Baud Rate
Peer baud rate different.
A052 In a peer-to-peer connection, a PcD length has Reduce number of words P703 SCom/SCB
been set which is too high (>5). PcD #
Peer PcD L
A053 In a peer-to-peer connection, the pcD length of Adjust the word length for transmitter and
transmitter and receiver do not match. receiver
Peer Lng f. P703 SCom/SCB PcD #
A057 Occurs when a TB is logged on and present, Replace TB configuration (software)
but parameter tasks from the PMU, SCom1 or
TB Param SCom2 have not been answered by the TB
within 6 seconds.
A061 An active signal is present at binector U065 Check cause of alarm (see FD 710)
(1).
Alarm 1
Function blocks
(1).
Alarm 2
Function blocks
(1).
Alarm 3
Function blocks
(1).
Alarm 4
Function blocks
A065 The auto restart option (P373) restarts the Caution!
drive. A possibly parameterized power-up
Auto restart active delay time (P374) expires if flying restart is not Personnel could be in danger when the drive
selected. During pre-charging of the DC link, automatically restarts. Check whether the auto
there is no time monitoring i.e. with an external restart function is really required!
electronics power supply, it is also switched-in
again.
A066 The measured target frequency of the external Check:
converter (or supply) is greater than the
fsyn > fmax parameterized maximum frequency of the - P452 n/f(max, FWD Spd)/ P453 n/f(max,REV
synchronizing converter. Spd) are correct and
- correct motor data set P578 Src MotDSet

Bit0 are selected
A067 The measured target frequency of the external Check:
converter (or supply) is less than the minimum
fsyn < fmin frequency required for synchronizing. - r533 Sync Target Freq
- Synchronizing cable.
A068 The setpoint frequency of the synchronizing Adjust total setpoint (main and additional
converter deviates too significantly from the setpoints) to the target frequency displayed in
fsyn<>fsoll measured target frequency of the external visualization parameter r533.
converter (or supply). The permissible
deviation can be set in P529.

A069 Synchronizing is not started as long as the Wait until acceleration has been completed.
ramp-function generator in the synchronizing
RGen active converter setpoint channel is active. This Check whether
alarm is only output if synchronizing is
selected. - P462 Accel Time
- P463 Accel Time Unit have been correctly

set.
A070 This alarm is output if the phase difference The alarm can only be deleted after
goes outside the synchronizing window (P531) synchronization has been exited.
Sync error after successful synchronization.
A071 An attempt has been made to start Insert the TSY board in the subrack
synchronization with either the synchronizing
tSY missing board not inserted or not parameterized.
A075 The measured values of the leakage Usually the leakage reactance P122 is the
measurement or of rotor resistance deviate average value resulting from the measured
Ls, Rr Dev. significantly. values in r546.1...12, and the rotor resistance
r126 from the values in r542.1..3.
If individual measured values significantly

deviate from the average values, they are
automatically not taken into account for the
calculation (for RI) or the value of the
automatic parameterization remains (for Ls).
It is only necessary to check the results for
their plausibility in the case of drives with high
requirements on torque or speed accuracy.
A076 The determined compensation time was Converter output and motor output are too
limited to the value range of 0.5 µs - 1.5 µs. different.
t-comp lim
Check motor data input P095 to P109.
A077 The measured resistance has been limited to Converter output and motor output are too
the maximum value of 49 %. different.
r-g limit
Check motor data input P095 to P109.
A078 The standstill measurement is executed when If the standstill measurement can be executed
the converter is powered up. The motor can without any danger:
Stands. Meas align itself several times in a certain direction
with this measurement. - Power up the converter.
A079 The rotating measurement has been aborted P561 Src InvRelese - Release the inverter
or cannot commence because an inverter stop
Mld Inv Stop command is present. If necessary, re-start the measurement by
powering-up the converter.
A080 When the converter is powered up, the If the rotating measurement can be executed
rotating measurement automatically without any danger:
MotId:Dr.M accelerates the drive. The drive can then only
be externally controlled in a restricted fashion. - Power up the converter.
A081 The following description refers to the 1st New configuration necessary
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see operating
CB alarm instructions for CB board.
The ID byte combinations which are being

sent from the DP master in the configuration
telegram are not in conformance with the
permissible ID byte combinations. (See also
Compendium, Chapter 8, Table 8.2-12).
Consequence:
No connection is made with the PROFIBUS
master.
A082 The following description refers to the 1st New configuration necessary.
CBP. For other CBs or the TB see the
CB alarm operating instructions for the CB board.
No valid PPO type can be identified from the

configuration telegram of the DP master.
Consequence:
No connection is made with the PROFIBUS
master.

A083 The following description refers to the 1st See operating instructions of the CB board
No net data or invalid net data (e.g. complete

control word STW1=0) are being received
from the DP master.
Consequence:
The process data are not passed on to the
dual port RAM. If P722 (P695) is not equal to
zero, this will cause the fault message F082 to
be tripped.
The telegram traffic between the DP master

and the CBP has been interrupted (e.g. cable
break, bus cable pulled out or DP master
powered down).
Consequence:
If P722 (P695) is not equal to zero, this will
cause the fault message F082 to be tripped.
The CBP does not generate this alarm!

Failure of the heartbeat counter on the basic

unit. The heartbeat counter on the basic unit is
no longer being incremented. The
communication between the CBP and the
basic board is disturbed.
Fault in the DPS manager software of the

CBP.
A088 See user manual for CB board See user manual for CB board
CB alarm
Alarm of the 2nd CB board corresponds to
CB alarm A81 of the 1st CB board
A095 Alarm of the 2nd CB board. Corresponds to See user manual for CB board
A87 of the 1st CB board
CB alarm
See operating instructions for CB board

A097 See user manual for TB board See user manual for TB board
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 1
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2

TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
TB alarm 2
Table 14-2 Alarm numbers, causes and their counter-measures
14.3 Fatal errors (FF)

Fatal errors are serious hardware or software errors which no longer
permit normal operation of the unit. They only appear on the PMU in
the form "FF<No>". The software is re-booted by actuating any key on
the PMU.

FF01 A time slot overflow which cannot be corrected - Increase sampling time (P357 or reduce
has been detected in the higher-priority time pulse frequency (P340)
Time slot overflow slots.
- Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
FF03 Serious faults have occurred while accessing - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
external option boards (CB, TB, SCB, TSY ..). PLUS type)
Access fault
Optional board - Replace the LBA
- Replace the option board

FF04 A fault has occurred during the test of the - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
RAM. PLUS type)
RAM
FF05 A fault has occurred during the test of the - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
EPROM. PLUS type)
EPROM fault
FF06 Stack has overflowed For VC: Increase sampling time (P357)
For MC: Reduce pulse frequency (P340)
Stack overflow
PLUS type)
FF07 Stack underflow - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Stack Underflow
- Replace firmware
FF08 Invalid processor command should be - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
processed PLUS type)
Undefined Opcode
- Replace firmware
FF09 Invalid format in a protected processor - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
command PLUS type)
Protection Fault
- Replace firmware
FF10 Word access to uneven address - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Illegal Word Operand
Address - Replace firmware
FF11 Jump command to uneven address - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
PLUS type)
Illegal Instruction
Access - Replace firmware
FF13 A version conflict between the firmware and - Replace firmware
the hardware has occurred. - Replace CU, or replace the unit (Compact
Wrong firmware PLUS type)
version
FF14 Unexpected fatal error Replace the board
FF processing (During processing of the fatal errors, a fault

number has occurred which is unknown to
date).
FF15 Stack overflow (C-Compiler Stack) Replace the board
CSTACK_OVERFLOW
FF16 NMI - Replace firmware
NMI error PLUS type)
Table 14-3 Fatal errors
07.2005 Environmental Friendliness
15 Environmental Friendliness
Environmental The number of components has been significantly reduced over earlier
aspects during the converter series by the use of highly integrated components and the
development modular design of the complete series. Thus, the energy requirement
during production has been reduced.
Special significance was placed on the reduction of the volume, weight
and variety of metal and plastic components.
Plastic components ABS: PMU support panel PC: Covers

used LOGO PP: Insulating boards
LDPE: Capacitor ring bus retrofit
PA6.6: Fuse holders, mounting rail, PS: Fan housing
capacitor holder, cable retainer, UP: Tensioning profile
connecting strips, terminal strip, retaining bolts,
supports, PMU adapter, covers, tensioning disk
cable holder
Halogen-containing flame retardants were, for all essential

components, replaced by environmentally-friendly flame retardants.
Environmental compatibility was an important criterium when selecting
the supplied components.
Environmental Purchased components are generally supplied in recyclable packaging

aspects during materials (board).
production Surface finishes and coatings were eliminated with the exception of the
galvanized sheet steel side panels.
ASIC devices and SMD devices were used on the boards.
The production is emission-free.
Environmental The unit can be broken down into recyclable mechanical components
aspects for disposal as a result of easily releasable screw and snap connections.
The plastic components are to DIN 54840 and have a recycling symbol.
After the service life has expired, the product must be disposed of in
accordance with the applicable national regulations.
Bisher sind folgende Ausgaben erschienen: Ausgabe interne Sachnummer
The following versions have been published so far: Version Internal item number
AA 476 869 4170 76 J AA-74
AB 476 869 4170 76 J AB-74
AC 476 869 4170 76 J AC-74
AD A5E00370502
AE A5E00370502
Ausgabe AE besteht aus folgenden Kapiteln:

Kapitel Änderungen Seiten- Ausgabe-
zahl datum
1 Definitionen und Warnungen überarbeitete Ausgabe 4 07.2005
2 Beschreibung überarbeitete Ausgabe 1 07.2005
3 Erstinbetriebsetzung überarbeitete Ausgabe 2 07.2005
4 Transportieren, Lagern, Auspacken überarbeitete Ausgabe 1 07.2005
5 Montage überarbeitete Ausgabe 13 05.2006
6 EMV-gerechter Aufbau überarbeitete Ausgabe 6 07.2005
7 Anschließen überarbeitete Ausgabe 24 05.2006
8 Parametrierung überarbeitete Ausgabe 26 07.2005
9 Parametrierschritte überarbeitete Ausgabe 70 05.2006
10 Steuerwort und Zustandswort überarbeitete Ausgabe 18 07.2005
11 Wartung überarbeitete Ausgabe 4 07.2005
12 Formieren überarbeitete Ausgabe 2 07.2005
13 Technische Daten überarbeitete Ausgabe 35 05.2006
14 Störungen und Warnungen überarbeitete Ausgabe 26 07.2005
15 Umweltverträglichkeit überarbeitete Ausgabe 1 07.2005
Version AE consists of the following chapters:

Chapter Changes Pages Version
date
1 Definitions and Warnings reviewed edition 4 07.2005
2 Description reviewed edition 1 07.2005
3 First Start-up reviewed edition 2 07.2005
4 Transport, Storage, Unpacking reviewed edition 1 07.2005
5 Installation reviewed edition 13 05.2006
6 Installation in Conformance with EMC reviewed edition 6 07.2005
Regulations
7 Connecting-up reviewed edition 24 05.2006
8 Parameterization reviewed edition 26 07.2005
9 Parameterizing Steps reviewed edition 70 05.2006
10 Control Word and Status Word reviewed edition 18 07.2005
11 Maintenance reviewed edition 4 07.2005
12 Forming reviewed edition 2 07.2005
13 Technical Data reviewed edition 35 05.2006
14 Faults and Warnings reviewed edition 26 07.2005
15 Environmental Friendliness reviewed edition 1 07.2005
Änderungen von Funktionen, technischen Daten, Normen,
Zeichnungen und Parametern vorbehalten.
We reserve the right to make changes to functions, technical data,

standards, drawings and parameters.
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfältigung dieser Unterlage, Verwertung

und Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrück-
lich zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadener-
satz. Alle Rechte vorbehalten, insbesondere für den Fall der
Patenterteilung oder GM-Eintragung.
Wir haben den Inhalt der Druckschrift auf Übereinstimmung mit

der beschriebenen Hard- und Software überprüft. Dennoch
können Abweichungen nicht ausgeschlossen werden, so dass wir
für die vollständige Übereinstimmung keine Garantie
übernehmen. Die Angaben in dieser Druckschrift werden jedoch
regelmäßig überprüft und notwendige Korrekturen sind in den
nachfolgenden Auflagen enthalten. Für Verbesserungsvorschläge
SIMOVERT® ist ein Warenzeichen von Siemens
sind wir dankbar.
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its con-

tents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by
patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that
they coincide with the described hardware and software.
However, differences cannot be completely excluded, so that we
do not accept any guarantee for complete conformance.
However, the information in this document is regularly checked
and necessary corrections will be included in subsequent editions.
We are grateful for any recommendations for improvement. SIMOVERT® Registered Trade Mark
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Motion Control Systems
P.O. Box 3180, D – 91050 Erlangen © Siemens AG 2006
Subject to change without prior notice
Germany Bestell-Nr./Order No.: 6SE7087-6KN60
www.siemens.com/motioncontrol Printed in Germany

VC BA Einbau DC D e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VC BA Einbau DC D e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

VC BA Einbau DC D e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

07.

1 DEFINITIONS AND WARNINGS ..................................................................... 1-1

2 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................. 2-1

3 FIRST START-UP ............................................................................................ 3-1

4 TRANSPORT, STORAGE, UNPACKING........................................................ 4-1

5 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Installing the units ............................................................................................. 5-1

5.2 Installing the option boards............................................................................. 5-11

6 DESIGN OF DRIVES IN CONFORMANCE WITH EMC REGULATIONS ...... 6-1

7 CONNECTING-UP ........................................................................................... 7-1

7.1 Power connections ........................................................................................... 7-4

7.2 Auxiliary power supply, main contactor ............................................................ 7-8

7.3 Control connections ........................................................................................ 7-10

7.4 Fan supply ...................................................................................................... 7-20

7.5 Fan fuses ........................................................................................................ 7-21

7.6 MASTER-SLAVE connection for parallel inverters......................................... 7-24

8.1 Parameter menus ............................................................................................. 8-1

8.2 Changeability of parameters............................................................................. 8-5

8.3 Parameter input with DriveMonitor ................................................................... 8-6

8.4 Parameter input via the PMU.......................................................................... 8-18

8.5 Parameter input via the OP1S........................................................................ 8-22

9 PARAMETERIZING STEPS............................................................................. 9-1

9.1 Parameter reset to factory setting .................................................................... 9-3

9.2 Quick parameterization procedures.................................................................. 9-9

9.3 Motor list ......................................................................................................... 9-42

9.4 Detailed parameterization............................................................................... 9-45

9.5 Notes regarding parameterization .................................................................. 9-62

10 CONTROL WORD AND STATUS WORD..................................................... 10-1

10.1 Description of the control word bits ................................................................ 10-1

10.2 Description of the status word bits................................................................ 10-11

11 MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 11-1

11.1 Replacing the fan............................................................................................ 11-2

11.2 Replacing the fan fuses (types J to Q) ........................................................... 11-3

11.3 Replacing the starting capacitor ..................................................................... 11-3

11.4 Replacing the capacitor battery ...................................................................... 11-4

11.5 Replacing the SML and the SMU ................................................................... 11-4

12 FORMING ....................................................................................................... 12-1

13 TECHNICAL DATA ........................................................................................ 13-1

13.1 Notes regarding water-cooled units.............................................................. 13-20

14 FAULTS AND ALARMS ................................................................................ 14-1

14.1 Faults .............................................................................................................. 14-1

14.2 Alarms........................................................................................................... 14-18

14.3 Fatal errors (FF)............................................................................................ 14-26

15 ENVIRONMENTAL FRIENDLINESS............................................................. 15-1

1 Definitions and Warnings

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

CAUTION used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous

NOTE For the purpose of this documentation, "Note" indicates important

WARNING Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during

CAUTION Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Fig. 1-1 ESD protective measures

Safety and Operating Instructions

ext. X9/1 24 V Internal X18/1 ext.

Fig. 2-1 Circuit principle of the inverter

*NOTE The fuses are an option in the case of types E to G!

Starting with the protective conductor please connect

Connect the control Please connect the remaining control, communication,

After checking that the cabling has been correctly